Electronics and communications engineering Books

3154 products


  • Grid Integration of Wind Energy

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Grid Integration of Wind Energy

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisThis popular reference describes the integration of wind-generated power into electrical power systems and, with the use of advanced control systems, illustrates how wind farms can be made to operate like conventional power plants.Table of ContentsPreface xi Notation xiii 1 Wind Energy Power Plants 1 1.1 Wind Turbine Structures 1 1.2 A Brief History 4 1.3 Milestones of Development 5 1.4 Functional Structures of Wind Turbines 20 References 30 2 Wind Energy Conversion Systems 31 2.1 Drive Torque and Rotor Power 31 2.1.1 Inputs and outputs of a wind turbine 31 2.1.2 Power extraction from the airstream 32 2.1.3 Determining power or driving torque by the blade element method 34 2.1.4 Simplifying the computation method 38 2.1.5 Modeling turbine characteristics 40 2.2 Turbines 46 2.2.1 Hub and turbine design 50 2.2.2 Rotor blade geometry 51 2.3 Power Control by Turbine Manipulation 57 2.3.1 Turbine yawing 57 2.3.2 Rotor blade pitch variation 67 2.3.3 Limiting power by stall control 97 2.3.4 Power control using speed variation 100 2.4 Mechanical Drive Trains 102 2.5 System Data of a Wind Power Plant 108 2.5.1 Turbine and drive train data 108 2.5.2 Machine and tower masses 110 2.5.3 Machine costs 111 References 116 3 Generating Electrical Energy from Mechanical Energy 119 3.1 Constraints and Demands on the Generator 119 3.2 Energy Converter Systems 122 3.2.1 Asynchronous generator construction 125 3.2.2 Synchronous generator construction 126 3.3 Operational Ranges of Asynchronous and Synchronous Machines 126 3.4 Static and Dynamic Torque 132 3.4.1 Static torque 133 3.4.2 Dynamic torque 147 3.5 Generator Simulation 154 3.5.1 Synchronous machines 155 3.5.2 Asynchronous machines 160 3.6 Design Aspects 161 3.6.1 Asynchronous generators 162 3.6.2 Synchronous generators for gearless plants 174 3.6.3 Multi-generator concept (Dissertation A. Ezzahraoui) 187 3.6.4 Ring generator with magnetic bearings (Dissertation K. Messol) 194 3.6.5 Compact superconductive and other new generator concepts 197 3.7 Machine Data 199 3.7.1 Mass and cost relationships 200 3.7.2 Characteristic values of asynchronous machines 202 3.7.3 Characteristic values of synchronous machines 204 References 208 4 The Transfer of Electrical Energy to the Supply Grid 210 4.1 Power Conditioning and Grid Connection 210 4.1.1 Converter systems 212 4.1.2 Power semiconductors for converters 215 4.1.3 Functional characteristics of power converters 218 4.1.4 Converter designs 222 4.1.5 Indirect converter 223 4.1.6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 236 4.1.7 Protective measures during power conditioning 237 4.2 Grid Protection 238 4.2.1 Fuses and grid disconnection 239 4.2.2 Short-circuiting power 239 4.2.3 Increase of short-circuit power 242 4.2.4 Isolated operation and rapid auto-reclosure 245 4.2.5 Overvoltages in the event of grid faults 247 4.3 Grid Effects 247 4.3.1 General compatibility and interference 247 4.3.2 Output behavior of wind power plants 248 4.3.3 Voltage response in grid supply 260 4.3.4 Harmonics and subharmonics 271 4.3.5 Voltage faults and the fault-ride-through (FRT) 279 4.4 Resonance Effects in the Grid During Normal Operation 284 4.5 Remedial Measures against Grid Effects and Grid Resonances 290 4.5.1 Filters 290 4.5.2 Filter design 292 4.5.3 Function of harmonic absorber filters and compensation units 293 4.5.4 Grid-specific filter layout 294 4.5.5 Utilizing compensating effects 297 4.6 Grid Control and Protection 300 4.6.1 Supply by wind turbines 300 4.6.2 Grid support and grid control with wind turbines and other renewable systems 301 4.6.3 Central reactive power control 305 4.6.4 System services and operation 308 4.6.5 Connection of wind turbine to the transmission grid 310 4.7 Grid Connection Rules 311 4.8 Grid Connection in the Offshore Region 317 4.8.1 Offshore wind farm properties 317 4.8.2 Stationary and dynamic behavior of offshore wind farms 319 4.8.3 Wind farm and cluster formation at sea and grid connection 319 4.8.4 Electrical energy transmission to the mainland 323 4.8.5 Reactive power requirement and reactive power provision in the offshore grid 325 4.8.6 Flexible AC transmission systems (FACTS) 330 4.9 Integration of the Wind Energy into the Grid and Provision of Energy 333 4.9.1 Grid extension 333 4.9.2 Provision of energy 335 4.9.3 Control and reserve power 337 4.9.4 Power reserve provision with wind farms (Dissertation A. J. Gesino) 338 4.9.5 Intercontinental grid connections 346 References 346 5 Control and Supervision of Wind Turbines 355 5.1 System Requirements and Operating Modes 356 5.2 Isolated Operation of Wind Turbines 358 5.2.1 Turbines without a blade pitch adjustment mechanism 359 5.2.2 Plants with a blade pitch adjustment mechanism 360 5.2.3 Plants with load management 362 5.2.4 Turbine control by means of a bypass 362 5.3 Grid Operation of Wind Turbines 363 5.4 Control Concepts 367 5.4.1 Control in isolated operation 367 5.4.2 Regulation of variable-speed turbines 371 5.4.3 Regulation of variable-slip asynchronous generators 373 5.4.4 Regulation of turbines with a rigid connection to the grid 388 5.4.5 Wind turbine control using hydrodynamic variable-speed superimposing gears 390 5.5 Controller Design 390 5.5.1 Adjustment processes and torsional moments at the rotor blades 392 5.5.2 Standardizing and linearizing the variables 395 5.5.3 Control circuits and simplified dimensioning 400 5.5.4 Improving the control characteristics 404 5.5.5 Control design for wind turbines 410 5.6 Management System 411 5.6.1 Operating states 412 5.6.2 Faults 423 5.6.3 Determining the state of system components 424 5.7 Monitoring and Safety Systems 424 5.7.1 Wind measuring devices 425 5.7.2 Oscillation monitoring 425 5.7.3 Grid surveillance and lightning protection 426 5.7.4 Surveillance computer 426 5.7.5 Fault prediction 427 5.7.6 Voltage limitation 429 References 430 6 Using Wind Energy 436 6.1 Wind Conditions and Energy Yields 436 6.1.1 Global wind conditions 436 6.1.2 Local wind conditions and annual available power from the wind 438 6.1.3 Calculation of site-specific and regional turbine yields 440 6.1.4 Wind atlas methods 444 6.2 Potential and Expansion 449 6.2.1 Wind energy use on land 449 6.2.2 Offshore wind energy use 451 6.2.3 Repowering 453 6.3 Economic Considerations 455 6.3.1 Purchase and maintenance costs 457 6.3.2 Power supply and financial yields 457 6.3.3 Blue section 460 6.3.4 Commercial calculation methods 461 6.4 Legal Aspects and the Installation of Turbines 463 6.4.1 Immission protection 464 6.4.2 Nature and landscape conservation 467 6.4.3 Building laws 468 6.4.4 Planning and planning permission 469 6.4.5 Procedure for erecting a wind turbine 470 6.4.6 Offshore utilization of wind energy 472 6.5 Ecological Balance 474 6.5.1 Contribution to climate protection 474 6.5.2 Landscape utilization 475 6.5.3 Bird strike 475 6.5.4 Bats 475 6.5.5 Recycling of wind turbines 475 6.5.6 Energetic amortization time and harvest factor 476 References 476 Index 483

    15 in stock

    £83.66

  • Introduction to MATLAB Global Edition

    Pearson Education Introduction to MATLAB Global Edition

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisTable of Contents 1 • AN INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING PROBLEM SOLVING 2 • GETTING STARTED WITH MATLAB 3 • MATLAB FUNCTIONS 4 • PLOTTING 5 • CONTROL STRUCTURES 6 • MATRIX COMPUTATIONS 7 • SYMBOLIC MATHEMATICS 8 • NUMERICAL TECHNIQUES INDEX

    15 in stock

    £63.19

  • Wind Farm Noise

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Wind Farm Noise

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to wind farm noise prediction, measurement, assessment, control and effects on people Wind Farm Noise covers all aspects associated with the generation, measurement, propagation, regulation and adverse health effects of noise produced by large horizontal-axis wind turbines of the type used in wind farms. The book begins with a brief history of wind turbine development and the regulation of their noise at sensitive receivers. Also included is an introductory chapter on the fundamentals of acoustics relevant to wind turbine noise so that readers are well prepared for understanding later chapters on noise measurements, noise generation mechanisms, noise propagation modelling and the assessment of the noise at surrounding residences. Key features: Potential adverse health effects of wind farm noise are discussed in an objective way. Means for calculating the noise at residences due to a wind farm prior to conTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Wind Energy and Noise 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Development of the Wind Energy Industry 2 1.3 History of Wind Turbine Noise Studies 13 1.4 Current Wind Farm Noise Guidelines and Assessment Procedures 18 1.5 Wind Farm Noise Standards 30 1.6 Regulations 33 1.7 Enquiries/Government Investigations 44 1.8 Current Consensus on Wind Farm Noise 53 References 55 2 Fundamentals of Acoustics 59 2.1 Introduction 59 2.2 Basic Acoustics Concepts 59 2.3 Basic Frequency Analysis 82 2.4 Advanced Frequency Analysis 89 2.5 Summary 121 References 122 3 Noise Generation 123 3.1 Introduction 123 3.2 Aeroacoustics 125 3.3 Aerodynamic noise generation on wind turbines 131 3.4 Aeroelasticity and Noise 152 3.5 Other Noise Sources 153 3.6 Summary and Outlook 155 References 157 4 Wind Turbine Sound Power Estimation 161 4.1 Introduction 161 4.2 Aerodynamic noise prediction 161 4.3 Simple models 162 4.4 Semi-empirical methods (Class II models) 163 4.5 Computational methods (Class III models) 173 4.6 Estimations of Sound Power From Measurements 174 4.7 Summary 182 References 183 5 Noise propagation 185 5.1 Introduction 185 5.2 Principles Underpinning Noise Propagation Modelling 186 5.3 Simplest Noise Propagation Models 217 5.4 Danish Low-Frequency Propagation Model 219 5.5 CONCAWE (1981) 220 5.6 ISO9613-2 (1996) Noise Propagation Model 229 5.7 NMPB-2008 Noise Propagation Model 238 5.8 Nord2000 Noise Propagation Model 250 5.9 Harmonoise (2002) Noise Propagation Engineering Model 269 5.10 Required Input Data for the Various Propagation Models 277 5.11 Off-Shore Wind Farm Propagation Models 281 5.12 Propagation Model Prediction Uncertainty 281 5.13 Outside vs Inside Noise at Residences 286 5.14 Vibration Propagation 289 5.15 Summary 294 References 295 6 Measurement 299 6.1 Introduction 299 6.2 Measurement of Environmental Noise Near Wind Farms 300 6.3 Vibration 406 6.4 Wind, Wind Shear and Turbulence 408 6.5 Reporting on Noise, Vibration and Meteorological Conditions 417 6.6 Wind Tunnel Testing 423 6.7 Conclusions 439 References 440 7 Effects of wind farm noise and vibration on people 447 7.1 Introduction 447 7.2 Annoyance and Adverse Health Effects 452 7.3 Hearing Mechanism 466 7.4 Reproduction of Wind Farm Noise for Adverse Effects Studies 476 7.5 Vibration Effects 478 7.6 Nocebo Effect 479 7.7 Summary and Conclusion 480 References 482 8 Wind Farm Noise Control 487 8.1 Introduction 487 8.2 Noise Control by Turbine Design Modification 488 8.3 Optimisation of turbine layout 498 8.4 Options for Noise Control at the Residences 499 8.5 Administrative Controls 503 8.6 Summary 504 References 505 9 Where to from here 507 9.1 Introduction 507 9.2 Further Investigation of the Effects of Wind Farm Noise on People 508 9.3 Improvements to Regulations and Guidelines 510 9.4 Propagation Model Improvements 515 9.5 Identification and Amelioration of the Problem Noise Sources on Wind Turbines 516 9.6 Reducing Low-Frequency Noise Levels in Residences 517 References 518 A Basic mathematics 519 A.1 Introduction 519 A.2 Logarithms 519 A.3 Complex Numbers 520 A.4 Exponential Function 520 B The BPM model 521 B.1 Boundary layer parameters 521 B.2 Turbulent trailing edge noise model 523 B.3 Blunt trailing edge noise model 525 References 527 C Ground Reflection Coefficient Calculations 529 C.1 Introduction 529 C.2 Flow Resistivity 530 C.3 Characteristic Impedance 530 C.4 Plane Wave Reflection Coefficient 533 C.5 Spherical Wave Reflection Coefficient 533 C.6 Incoherent Reflection Coefficient 537 References 539 D Calculation of Ray Path Distances and Propagation Times for the Nord2000 Model 541 D.1 Introduction 541 D.2 Equivalent Linear Atmospheric Vertical Sound Speed Profile 542 D.3 Calculation of Ray Path Lengths and Propagation Times 544 D.3.1 Direct ray 544 D.3.2 Reflected ray 546 References 549 E Calculation of Terrain Parameters for the Nord2000 Sound Propagation Model 551 E.1 Introduction 551 E.2 Terrain Effects 551 E.3 Approximating Terrain profiles by Straight Line Segments 556 E.4 Calculation of the Excess Attenuation Due to the Ground Effect for Relatively Flat Terrain with no Diffraction Edges 558 E.5 Calculation of the Excess Attenuation Due to the Ground Effect for Relatively Flat Terrain with a Variable Impedance Surface and no Diffraction Edges 559 E.6 Calculation of the Excess Attenuation Due to the Ground Effect for Valley-Shaped Terrain 561 E.7 Identification of the Two Most Efficient Diffraction Edges 561 E.8 Calculation of the Sound Pressure at the Receiver for Each Diffracted Path in Hilly Terrain 564 E.9 Calculation of the Combined Ground and Barrier Excess Attenuation Effects 575 References 583 F Calculation of Fresnel Zone Sizes and Weights 585 F.1 Introduction 585 F.2 Fresnel Zone for Reflection From Flat Ground 585 F.3 Fresnel Weights for Reflection From a Concave or Transition Ground Segment589 F.4 Fresnel Weights for Reflection from a Convex Ground Segment 591 References 592 G Calculation of Diffraction and Ground Effects for the Harmonoise Model 593 G.1 Introduction 593 G.2 Diffraction Effect, _LD 596 G.3 Ground Effect 598 G.3.1 Concave model 600 G.3.2 Transition model 604 G.4 Fresnel Zone for Reflection from a Ground Segment 606 References 610 H Active Noise Control System Algorithms 611 H.1 Introduction 611 References 616

    15 in stock

    £88.16

  • Canon EOS 70D for Dummies

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Canon EOS 70D for Dummies

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisStart getting great photos with your Canon EOS 70D right away The Canon EOS 70D features upgraded focusing technology, a 20. 2 megapixel sensor, and faster frame-per-second shooting.Table of ContentsIntroduction 1 A Quick Look at What’s Ahead 1 Icons and Other Stuff to Note 2 eCheat Sheet 3 Practice, Be Patient, and Have Fun! 3 Part I: Fast Track to Super Snaps 5 Chapter 1: Getting the Lay of the Land 7 Looking at Lenses 7 Choosing a lens 8 Attaching and removing a lens 11 Zooming in and out 12 Using an IS (image stabilizer) lens 13 Getting acquainted with focusing 14 Adjusting the Viewfinder 15 Adjusting the Monitor Position 16 Using the Touchscreen 17 Working with Memory Cards 20 Exploring External Camera Features 22 Topside controls 22 Back-of-the-body controls 24 Front odds and ends 27 Connection ports 28 Ordering from Camera Menus 30 Navigating the Custom Functions Menu 32 Monitoring Critical Camera Settings 34 The Info button: Choosing what the screen shows 34 Checking the Camera Settings display 35 Viewing the Shooting Settings display 36 Decoding viewfinder data 38 Reading the LCD panel 40 Changing Settings via the Quick Control Screen 40 Getting Help from Your Camera 42 Reviewing Basic Setup Options 42 Cruising the Setup menus 43 Setting up the Lock switch 49 Taking two final setup steps 50 Chapter 2: Choosing Basic Picture Settings 51 Choosing an Exposure Mode 52 Changing the Drive Mode 54 Getting Familiar with the Built-in Flash 56 Using flash in the fully automatic modes 57 Enabling flash in advanced exposure modes 59 Using Red-Eye Reduction flash 60 Controlling Picture Quality 60 Diagnosing quality problems 61 Decoding the Image Quality options 63 Considering Resolution: Large, Medium, or Small? 65 Understanding File Type (JPEG or Raw) 68 JPEG: The imaging (and web) standard 68 Raw (CR2): The purist’s choice 70 My take: Choose Fine or Raw 72 Chapter 3: Taking Great Pictures, Automatically 73 As Easy As It Gets: Auto and Flash Off 74 Taking Advantage of Scene (SCN) Modes 77 Modifying scene mode results 88 Gaining More Control with Creative Auto 94 Chapter 4: Exploring Live View Shooting and Movie Making 99 Getting Started 100 Reviewing Live View and Movie mode cautions 102 Customizing the display 103 Focusing in Live View and Movie Modes 106 Disabling continuous autofocusing 106 Choosing an AF (autofocus) mode 109 Manual focusing 118 Zooming in for a focus check 118 Exploring Other Live View Options 119 Setting the photo aspect ratio 120 Adjusting other Live View picture settings 120 Using the touch shutter 127 Recording Your First Movie 128 Customizing Movie Recording Settings 131 Movie Menu 1 133 Movie Menu 2 134 Using Movie Digital Zoom 139 Snapping a Photo During Recording 140 Playing Movies 141 Part II: Working with Picture Files 145 Chapter 5: Picture Playback 147 Disabling and Adjusting Image Review 147 Exploring Playback Mode 148 Switching to Index (thumbnails) view 149 Using the Quick Control screen during playback 150 Jumping through images 151 Rotating pictures 154 Zooming in for a closer view 156 Viewing Picture Data 157 Basic Information display data 159 Shooting Information display mode 160 Understanding Histogram display mode 162 Enabling a few display extras 165 Deleting Photos 166 Erasing single images 166 Erasing all images on the memory card 167 Erasing selected images 167 Protecting Photos 169 Protecting (or unprotecting) a single photo 169 Protecting multiple photos 170 Rating Photos 172 Viewing Your Photos on a Television 174 Chapter 6: Downloading, Printing, and Sharing Your Photos 177 Installing the Canon Software 178 Sending Pictures to the Computer 180 Connecting camera and computer via USB 180 Connecting to the computer via Wi-Fi 181 Downloading from the camera 185 Downloading from a card reader 187 Processing Raw (CR2) Files 189 Processing Raw images in the camera 189 Converting Raw images in Digital Photo Professional 192 Planning for Perfect Prints 196 Check the pixel count before you print 196 Allow for different print proportions 198 Calibrate your monitor 200 Preparing Pictures for Online Sharing 201 Part III: Taking Creative Control 205 Chapter 7: Getting Creative with Exposure 207 Kicking Your Camera into High Gear 207 Introducing Exposure Basics: Aperture, Shutter Speed, and ISO 209 Understanding exposure-setting side effects 211 Doing the exposure balancing act 215 Monitoring Exposure Settings 216 Choosing an Exposure Metering Mode 219 Setting ISO, f-stop, and Shutter Speed 222 Controlling ISO 222 Adjusting aperture and shutter speed 225 Sorting through Your Camera’s Exposure-Correction Tools 227 Overriding autoexposure results with Exposure Compensation 227 Improving high-contrast shots 231 Experimenting with Auto Lighting Optimizer 236 Correcting vignetting with Peripheral Illumination Correction 239 Dampening noise 242 Locking Autoexposure Settings 244 Bracketing Exposures Automatically 246 Setting up for automatic bracketing 247 Shooting a bracketed series 250 Using Flash in Advanced Exposure Modes 250 Understanding your camera’s approach to flash 251 Using flash outdoors 255 Adjusting flash power with Flash Exposure Compensation 256 Locking the flash exposure 259 Exploring more flash options 260 Chapter 8: Manipulating Focus and Color 265 Reviewing Focus Basics 265 Introducing the AF-ON button 267 Adjusting Autofocus Performance 268 AF Area mode: One focus point or many? 269 Changing the AF (autofocus) mode 271 Choosing the right autofocus combo 273 Manipulating Depth of Field 274 Controlling Color 279 Correcting colors with white balance 279 Changing the White Balance setting 281 Creating a custom White Balance setting 283 Fine-tuning White Balance settings 285 Bracketing shots with white balance 288 Taking a Quick Look at Picture Styles 293 Chapter 9: Putting It All Together 299 Recapping Basic Picture Settings 299 Setting Up for Specifi c Scenes 302 Shooting still portraits 302 Capturing action 307 Capturing scenic vistas 311 Capturing dynamic close-ups 314 Part IV: The Part of Tens 317 Chapter 10: Ten Features to Explore on a Rainy Day 319 Enabling Mirror Lockup Shooting 320 Adding Cleaning Instructions to Images 320 Tagging Files with Your Copyright Claim 321 Exploring Wi-Fi Functions 322 Experimenting with Creative Filters 324 Shooting in Multiple Exposure Mode 328 Investigating Two More Printing Options 329 Presenting a Slide Show 329 Editing Movies 330 Creating Video Snapshots 331 Chapter 11: Ten More Ways to Customize Your Camera 333 Creating Your Own Exposure Mode 333 Creating Your Very Own Camera Menu 335 Creating Custom Folders 337 Changing the Color Space from sRGB to Adobe RGB 338 Changing the Direction of the Dials 339 Changing All the Furniture Around 339 Disabling the AF-Assist Beam 341 Controlling the Lens Focus Drive 342 Making the Flashing Red AF Points Go Away 343 Considering a Few Other Autofocusing Tweaks 343 Appendix: Glossary of Digital Photography Terms 347 Index 359

    15 in stock

    £20.79

  • Shipboard Power Systems Design and Verification

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Shipboard Power Systems Design and Verification

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisThe only book that covers fundamental shipboard design and verification concepts from individual devices to the system level Shipboard electrical system design and development requirements are fundamentally different from utility-based power generation and distribution requirements. Electrical engineers who are engaged in shipbuilding must understand various design elements to build both safe and energy-efficient power distribution systems. This book covers all the relevant technologies and regulations for building shipboard power systems, which include commercial ships, naval ships, offshore floating platforms, and offshore support vessels. In recent years, offshore floating platforms have been frequently discussed in exploring deep-water resources such as oil, gas, and wind energy. This book presents step-by-step shipboard electrical system design and verification fundamentals and provides information on individual electrical devices and practical design examples, along with ampleTable of ContentsPreface xix 1. Overview 1 1.0 Introduction 1 1.1 Shipboard Power System Design Fundamentals 3 1.2 Ship Design Requirements 3 1.3 ETO Certification: MEECE 4 1.4 Legacy System Design Development and Verification 4 1.5 Shipboard Electrical System Design Verification and Validation (V&V) 5 1.5.1 Verification and Validation (V&V) Overview 5 1.5.2 Verification 5 1.5.2a Acceptance of Verification 8 1.5.3 Validation 8 1.5.4 Differences between Verification and Validation: Shipboard Electrical System Design and Development Process 8 1.6 IEEE 45 DOT Standards: Recommended Practice for Shipboard Electrical Installation 10 1.7 Other Rules and Regulations, and Standards in Support of IEEE 45 DOT Standards 11 1.8 Shipboard Ungrounded Power System 11 1.9 Shipboard Electrical Design Basics 12 1.10 Electrical Design Plan Submittal Requirements 14 1.11 ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels 15 1.12 Shipboard Electrical Safety Considerations 17 1.13 High-Resistance Grounding Requirements for Shipboard Ungrounded Systems (See Chapter 9 for Details) 18 1.14 Shipboard Electrical Safety Considerations 19 1.14.1 Arc Flash Basics (See Section 12 for Details) 19 1.14.2 Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Procedures 20 1.14.3 Warning Label Placement 21 1.15 Propulsion Power Requirements (IEEE Std 45-2002, Clause 7.4.2) 21 1.16 IMO-Solas Electric Propulsion Power Redundancy Requirements 22 1.17 Regulatory Requirements for Emergency Generator 23 1.18 USCG Dynamic Positioning (DP) Guidelines 24 1.19 IEC/ISO/IEEE 80005-1-2012: Utility Connections in Port—High Voltage Shore Connection (HVSC) Systems—General Requirements 28 1.20 Mil Standard 1399 Medium Voltage Power System Characteristics 28 1.21 Shipboard Power Quality and Harmonics (See Chapter 7 for Detail Requirements) 29 1.21.1 IEEE Std 45-2002, Clause 4.6, Power Quality and Harmonics 29 1.21.2 Power Conversion Equipment-Related Power Quality 30 1.21.2a IEEE Std 45-2002, Clause 31.8, Propulsion Power Conversion Equipment (Power Quality) 30 1.22 USCG Plan Submittal Requirements 31 1.23 ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels (Partial Listing) 32 1.24 Design Verification and Validation 33 1.24.1 Design Verification Test Procedure (DVTP) 33 1.24.2 Qualitative Failure Analysis (QFA) 36 1.24.3 IEEE 519 Harmonic Standard 36 1.25 Remarks for VFD Applications Onboard Ship 36 2. Electrical System Design Fundamentals and Verifications 37 2.0 Introduction 37 2.1 Design Basics 39 2.2 Marine Environmental Condition Requirements for the Shipboard Electrical System Design 40 2.3 Power System Characteristics: MIL-STD-1399 Power Requirements 41 2.4 ABS Type Approval Procedure (Taken From ABS Directives) 42 2.4.1 List of Recognized Laboratories 45 2.4.2 Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Program 45 2.4.3 Procedure for Becoming Type Approved 47 2.5 Shipboard Electrical Power System Design Basics 48 2.5.1 Table 2.4: Explanation for Note 1 of Figure 2.1 (Use of Multiple Options, Step Down Transformer, MG Set,PCU) 49 2.5.2 Table 2.5: Explanation for Note 2 of Figure 2.1 (Use of Power Conversion Unit to Supply Power from MV SWBD to the Ship Service SWBD) 50 2.5.3 Table 2.6: Explanation for Note 3 of Figure 2.1 (Use of Motor Generator with MV Input to AC Motor and Driving AC Generator) 51 2.5.4 Table 2.7: Explanation for Note 4 of Figure 2.1 (High-PowerBattery Supplying Power to the 480 V Ship Service Switchboard) 51 2.5.5 Table 2.8: Explanation for Note 5 of Figure 2.1 (Use of Step Down Service Transformer to Supply Power from MV SWBD to the Ship Service SWBD) 52 2.5.6 Table 2.9: Explanation for Note 6 of Figure 2.1 (Variable Frequency of Adjustable Drive for Electrical Propulsion Application) 53 2.6 Shipboard Electrical Standard Voltages 53 2.6.1 NORSOK Standard 6.1 System Voltage and Frequency 54 2.7 Voltage and Frequency Range (MIL-STD-1399) 55 2.8 Ungrounded System Concept (ANSI and IEC) 55 2.9 Concept Design 56 2.9.1 Power Generation 56 2.9.2 Power Distribution 56 2.10 Design Features Outlined in 56 2.11 Protective Device–Circuit Breaker Characteristics 57 2.12 Fault Current Calculation and Analysis Requirement 57 2.12.1 Fault Current Calculation Fundamentals 59 2.13 Adjustable Drive Fundamentals 59 2.13.1 Advantages of ASD for Shipboard Application 59 2.13.2 Disadvantages of VFD/ASD for Shipboard Application 61 2.14 Fundamentals of ASD Noise Management 61 2.15 Electrical Noise Management (See Chapter 7 for Additional Details) 62 2.16 Motor Protection Solutions: DV/DT Motor Protection Output Filter 64 3. Power System Design, Development, and Verification 67 3.0 Introduction: Design, Development, and Verification Process 67 3.1 Typical Design and Development of Power Generation and Distribution (See Figure 3.1) 67 3.2 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA): Design Fundamentals 68 3.2.1 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) 68 3.3 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) Electric Propulsion System Diesel Generator: Design Fundamentals 70 3.3.1 Diesel Engine Operational Mode Selection 70 3.3.2 Diesel Generator Safety System Functions 71 3.3.3 Power Management Overview Mimic (Central Control Station and Switchboard) 72 3.3.4 Power Distribution Mimic Page 73 3.4 Design Verification: General 73 3.4.1 Qualitative Failure Analysis (QFA) 73 3.4.2 Qualitative Failure Analysis (QFA) Basics 74 3.4.3 Process Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA): General 74 3.4.4 Qualitative Failure Analysis (QFA)-1 75 3.4.5 Explanation of the Detail Design Using QFA 75 3.4.6 Design Verification Test Procedure (DVTP): General 75 3.4.7 Example-1: Propulsion Plant (DVTP) Design Verification Test Procedure 77 3.5 Ship Service Power System Design: System-Level Fundamentals (Figure 3.2) 78 3.6 Single Shaft Electric Propulsion (Figure 3.3) 79 3.7 Electrical Generation and Distribution with Detail Design Information (Figure 3.4) 81 3.8 Electric Propulsion and Power Conversion Unit for Ship Service Distribution (Figure 3.5) 83 3.9 6600V and 690V Adjustable Speed Application with High-Resistance Grounding-1 (Figure 3.6) 85 3.10 MV and 690V Adjustable Speed Application with High-Resistance Grounding (Figure 3.7) 87 3.11 Fully Integrated Power System Design with Adjustable Speed Drive (Figure 3.8) 89 3.12 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Voltage Ratings and System Protection 91 3.13 Example 460V, Three-Phase, Full Wave Bridge Circuit Feeding Into a Capacitive Filter to Create a 650 VDC Power Supply 91 3.14 Special Cable and Cable Termination Requirements for Variable Frequency Drive Application 91 3.15 Harmonic Management Requirements for Variable Frequency Drive Application 91 3.16 Switchgear Bus Bar Ampacity, Dimension, and Space Requirements 93 3.16.1 Bus Bar Rating for English Dimensions (Inches) 93 3.16.2 Bus Bar Rating for Metric Dimensions (Millimeter:MM) 94 3.16.3 Nominal Working Space Requirements 95 3.17 MEECE (Management of Electrical and Electronics Control Equipment) Course Outline Requirements: USCG 96 4. Power Generation and Distribution 99 4.0 Introduction 99 4.1 Generation System Requirements 101 4.2 IEEE Std 45-2002, ABS-2002 and IEC for Generator Size and Rating Selection 104 4.3 ABS-2002 Section 4-8-2-3.1.3 Generator Engine Starting from Dead Ship Condition (Extract) 106 4.4 Additional Details of Sizing Ship Service Generators 109 4.4.1 Engine Governor Characteristics 110 4.4.2 Generator Voltage Regulator Characteristics 110 4.4.3 How AVR works: 111 4.4.4 Droop Characteristics: Generator Set 111 4.5 Typical Generator Prime Mover 112 4.6 Generator: Typical Purchase Specification (Typical Electrical Propulsion System) 113 5. Emergency Power System Design and Development 115 5.0 Introduction 115 5.1 USCG 46 CFR Requirements: 112.05 (Extract Only) 116 5.2 IEEE STD 45-2002, Clause 6.1, General (Extract) 117 5.3 Emergency Source of Electrical Power: ABS 2010, 5.1.1 Requirement 118 5.4 ABS Emergency Generator Starting Requirement (ABS Rule for Passenger Vessels) 118 5.5 Typical Emergency Generation and Distribution System 119 5.6 Emergency Generator and Emergency Transformer Rating: Load Analysis (Sample Calculation) 120 5.7 Emergency Power Generation and Distribution with Ship Service Power and Distribution System 120 5.8 Emergency Transformer 450 V/120V (Per ABS) 120 5.9 Emergency Generator Starting Block Diagram 120 5.10 Emergency Generation and Distribution Design Verification 122 5.11 No-Break Emergency Power Distribution 123 6. Protection and Verification 124 6.0 Introduction: Protection System Fundamentals 124 6.1 Protective Device: Glossary 126 6.2 Power System Protections 128 6.3 Power System: Procedure for Protective Device Coordination 131 6.4 Fault Current Calculation Guidelines (Per USCG Requirements) 132 6.5 Overall Protection Synopsis 132 6.6 ANSI Electrical Device Numbering (for Device Number Details Refer to ANSI C.37.2) 135 6.7 Fault Current Calculations (Per USCG Requirements CFR 111-52-3(B) & (C)) 136 6.7.1 Maximum Asymmetrical Fault Current 137 6.7.2 Average Asymmetrical Fault Current 137 6.7.3 450 V Switchboard Rating 138 6.7.4 450 V Switchboard Circuit Breaker Rating 138 6.7.5 Fault Current Calculation for the 120 Voltage System is as follows 138 6.7.6 RMS Symmetric Current 138 6.7.7 Fault Current Calculation Summary 138 6.8 Details for Figure 6.3 Typical EOL for MV Generator Protection System: Split Bus with Two Bustie Breakers 141 6.9 Details for Figure 6-4: Typical EOL for MV Generator Protection System: Split Bus with Two Bustie Breakers 143 6.10 Details for Figure 6.5 Typical for Transformer Protection Schematic 144 6.11 Details for Figure 6.10: Typical EOL for MV VFD Transformer Protection Schematic 145 6.11.1 Low Overcurrent Setting: (I>) 149 6.11.2 High Overcurrent Setting: (I>>) 150 6.11.3 Conclusion of Calculation 150 6.12 Power System Dynamic Calculations 155 6.13 Protective Relay Coordination and Discrimination Study 155 7. Power Quality: Harmonics 158 7.0 Introduction 158 7.1 Solid-State Devices Carrier Frequency 160 7.2 MIL-STD-1399 Requirements 162 7.3 IEEE STD 519 Requirements (1992 and 2014 Versions) 162 7.3.1 Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) 164 7.3.2 Total Demand Distortion (TDD): Current Harmonics 165 7.4 Calculate the RMS Harmonic Voltage Due to the Respective Harmonic Current 165 7.5 Current Harmonic Matters 167 7.6 Harmonic Numbering 167 7.7 DNV Regulation: Harmonic Distortion 168 7.8 Examples of Typical Shipboard Power System Harmonic Current Calculations 169 7.9 Choice of 18-Pulse Drive versus 6-Pulse Drive with Active Harmonic Filter 171 7.10 Typical Software to Calculate Total Harmonic Distortion and Filter Applications 172 7.11 Harmonic Recommendations (IEEE 45.1 Partial Extract) 175 7.12 Harmonic Silencing and ARC Prevention (Curtsey of Applied Energy) 180 7.13 Applicable Power Quality Standards Include 184 8. Shipboard Cable Application and Verification 185 8.0 Introduction: Shipboard Cable Application 185 8.1 Cable Size Calculation Fundamentals 185 8.2 Shipboard Cable for ASD and VFD Applications 186 8.3 Cable Requirements Per IEEE Std 45 186 8.4 Cable Shielding Guide Per IEEE Std 1143 187 8.5 Cable: Physical Characteristics 192 8.6 Cable Insulation: Typical 197 8.7 Cable Ampacity 199 8.8 Commercial Shipboard Cable Circuit Designation 203 8.9 Example 1: Low-Voltage 600 V/1000V IEC Cable Details 205 8.10 Example 2: MV Voltage 8 KV/10 KV 206 8.11 Example 3: VFD Cable LV (600 V/100) and MV VOLTAGE (8 KV/10 KV) 208 8.12 Ground Conductor Size 208 8.13 Develop Math to Calculate the Ground Conductor for Parallel Run 209 8.14 Cable Designation Type (Typical Ship Service Cable Symbol or Designation) 209 8.15 Cable Color Code: Shipboard Commercial Cable 210 8.16 ASD (VFD) Cable Issues for Shipboard Application 211 8.17 ABS Steel Vessel Rule: Part 4, Chapter 8, Section 4: Shipboard Cable Application 212 8.18 Grounding Conductor Size: for Cable Rated 2 KV or Less for Single Run 214 9. Grounding, Insulation Monitoring Design, and Verification 216 9.0 Introduction 216 9.1 System Grounding Per IEEE 45 217 9.1.1 Shipboard LV Power System Grounding IEEE 45 Recommendations (See Figures 9.1 and 9.2) 217 9.2 Selection of High-Resistance Grounding (HRG) System 219 9.3 IEEE 142 Ground Detection Requirements 220 9.4 IEC Requirements: Insulation Monitoring System 221 9.4.1 Insulation Monitoring 224 9.4.2 Insulation Monitoring System for Grounded AC Systems with VFD System 224 9.5 System Capacitance to Ground Charging Current Calculation (Taken From IEEE 142 Figs. 1.6 and 1.9) 225 9.6 Total System Capacitance Calculation 225 9.7 Calculate Capacitive Charging Current: (for a Typical Installation) 226 9.8 Capacitive Charging Current Calculation: Sample Calculation 227 9.8.1 Iccc Calculation for Generators 12,000 kVA, 6600V, 3-Phase, 3-Wire—Total 4 227 9.8.2 Iccc Calculation for Transformers 227 9.8.3 Cables 8 kV—(4/0 AWG) (T-212) Cable Three Core 228 9.8.4 Total Capacitive Charging Current 228 9.8.5 Grounding Transformer Size Calculation 229 9.8.6 Grounding Resistor Size Calculation 229 9.9 Grounding Resistor Selection Guideline Per IEEE STD 32-1972 230 9.10 Grounding Resistor Duty Rating 231 9.11 Zigzag Grounding Transformers: IEEE STD 142 Section 1.5.2 232 9.12 Rating and Testing Neutral Grounding Resistors: IEEE STD 32-1972 233 9.13 Voltage Stabilizing Ground Reference (VSGR) Phaseback for Ground Detection (Curtsey of Applied Energy) 234 9.13.1 Typical HRG Elementary Diagrams are Very Close to the Voltage Stabilizing Ground Reference (VSGR) Phaseback Unit, Looking Alike Phaseback’s Function is Exactly Opposite to the HRG 238 9.13.2 Phaseback Voltage Stabilizing Ground Reference Addresses and Solves the Following Issues 239 9.14 HRG Versus VSGR 240 9.15 Shipboard Ground Detection System Recommendations 240 10. Shore Power LV and MV Systems 242 10.0 Introduction 242 10.1 LV Shore Power System 242 10.2 MV (HV) Shore Power System 243 10.3 Low-Voltage Shore Power System 250 10.4 Four-Wire Grounded System LV Shore Power Connections 253 10.5 Medium-Voltage Shore Power System (MV) 253 10.6 Extract from IEC/ISO/IEEE 80005-1 Part 1: High-Voltage Shore nConnection (HVSC) Systems HV Shore Power Requirements (Shore to Ship Power Quality and Protection Requirements) 256 11. Smart Ship System Design (S3D) and Verification 260 11.0 Introduction 260 11.1 Virtual Prototyping for Electrical System Design 261 11.2 Electrical Power System Smart Ship System Design FailureMode and Effect Analysis 264 11.3 Marine Technology Society (MTS) Guidelines for DP Vessel Design Philosophy: Guidelines for Modu DP System and Commercial Ships 266 11.4 Additional Marine Technology Society (MTS) Requirements Applicable for Ship Design: (USCG Recognized MTS Requirements) 266 11.5 Condition-based Maintenance 272 11.6 FMEA Objectives: S3D Concept 272 11.7 Additional S3D Process Safety Features 272 12. Electrical Safety and Arc Flash Analysis 274 12.0 Introduction 274 12.1 Injuries Result from Electrical-Current Shorts 274 12.2 General Safety Tips for Working with or Near Electricity 275 12.3 Arc Flash Basics 276 12.4 Fundamentals of Electrical Arc and Arc Flash 277 12.5 Definitions Related to Arc Flash (Derived from NFPA 70E NEC, NFPA 70E, and IEEE STD 1580 for Shipboard Electrical Installations) 278 12.6 Causes of Electric Arc 279 12.7 Incident Energy 279 12.8 Incident Energy at Arc Flash Protection Boundary 280 12.9 The Flash Protection Boundary 280 12.10 Electrical Hazards: Arc Flash with Associated Blast andShock 280 12.11 Shock Hazard 281 12.12 Hazard/Risk Categories (Derived from NFPE-70E) 282 12.12.1 Hazard/Risk Category: Description (HRC-0) 282 12.12.2 Hazard/Risk Category: Description (HRC-1) 282 12.12.3 Hazard/Risk Category: Description (HRC-2) 285 12.12.4 Hazard/Risk Category: Description (HRC-3) 285 12.12.5 Hazard/Risk Category: Description (HRC-4) 285 12.13 Shipboard Electrical Safety Compliance Chart per NFPA 70E 2012 Table 130.7.C.9 285 12.14 Arc Flash: OSHA Requirements (29 CFR 1910.333) 286 12.15 Arc Flash: National Electrical Code (NEC) Requirements 286 12.16 Arc Flash: NFPA 70E 2012 Requirements 287 12.17 Arc Flash Boundary: NFPA 70E 289 12.18 Low-Voltage (50 V–1000 V) Protection (NFPA 70E 130.3 (A1)) 290 12.19 Medium-Voltage (1000V and Above) (NFPA 70E 130.3 (A2)) 290 12.20 Arc Flash: IEEE 1584 Requirements and Guidelines 291 12.21 Arc Flash: Circuit Breaker Time Currect Coordination—Overview 292 12.22 Arc Flash Calculation Analysis and Spreadsheet Deliverables 296 12.22.1 For Shipboard Arc Flash Analysis the Following Should be Included 296 12.23 Methods of Developing Analysis 296 12.23.1 Coordination Study 296 12.24 Fault Current Analysis to Ensure Power System Component Protection Characteristics 296 12.25 Fault Current Calculation: Approximation for Arc Flash Analysis 297 12.26 Shipboard Fault Current Calculation Guidelines (per USCG Requirements) 298 12.27 Example Shipboard Fault Current Calculations (per USCG Requirements CFR 111-52-3(B) & (C)) 298 12.28 Shipboard Power System Short-Circuit Current Calculation (Refer to US Navy Design Data Sheet 300-2 for Details) 299 12.29 Fault Current and Arc Flash Analysis as Required by NFPA 70E 300 12.30 Fault Current and Arc Flash Analysis Guide by IEEE 1584 301 12.31 Electrical Safety and Arc Flash Labeling (NFPA 70E) 302 12.32 Arc Flash Protection-Boundary 303 12.33 Sample Arc Flash Calculations: Spreadsheet—Excel Type 304 12.33.1 NFPA 70E 2009 Equation D.5.2 (A) for Arc Flash Calculation 304 12.34 Low-Voltage (50 V–1000 V) Protection (NFPA 70E 130.3 (A1)) 304 12.35 Medium Voltage (1000V and Above) (NFPA 70E 130.3 (A2)) 304 12.36 IEEE 1584-Based Arc Flash Calculations 305 12.36.1 IEEE 1584: Incident Energy Exposure 305 12.36.2 IEEE 1584: Arcing Current Calculation: Up to 1000V Systems 305 12.36.3 IEEE 1584: Arcing Current Calculation for 1 kV to 15 kV 306 12.36.4 IEEE 1584: Flash Protection Boundary Calculation (DB) 306 12.36.5 IEEE 1584: Flash Protection Boundary 306 12.36.6 IEEE 1584: Level of PPE 306 12.36.7 IEEE-1584: Equipment Class 307 12.36.8 IEEE 1584: Distance Exponent 307 12.36.9 IEEE 1584: Arc Duration/Total Arc Clearing Time 308 12.36.10 IEEE 1584: Available Three-Phase Bolted Fault Current 308 12.36.11 IEEE 1584: Predicted Three-Phase Arcing Current 308 12.37 Sample Shipboard Arc Flash Calculation Project 310 12.37.1 General 310 12.37.2 Short-Circuit Study 310 12.37.3 Protective Device Coordination Study 310 12.37.4 Arc Flash Hazard Study 310 12.37.5 Analysis 310 12.37.6 Report 311 12.38 Fast-Acting Arc Management System: Arc Flash Mitigating Hardware Driven Time 311 12.39 Guidelines for Shipboard Personnel 312 Glossary 315 Index 325

    15 in stock

    £90.86

  • EW 101: A First Course in Electronic Warfare

    Artech House Publishers EW 101: A First Course in Electronic Warfare

    2 in stock

    Book SynopsisEW 101 has been a popular column in the Journal of Electronic Defense for a number of years. This compilation of tutorial articles from JED provides introductory level electronic warfare instruction for students of the discipline.Table of ContentsIntroduction. Basic Mathematical Concepts - dB Values and Equations. The Link Equation for ALL EW Functions. Link Issues in Practical EW Applications. Relations in Sherical Triangles. EW Applications of Spherical Trigonometry. Antennas - Antenna Parameters and Definitions. Types of Antennas. Parameter Tradeoffs in Parabolic Antennas. Phased Array Antennas. Receivers - Crystal Video Receiver. IFM Receiver. Tuned Radio Frequency Receiver. Superheterodyne Receiver. Fixed Tuned Receiver. Channelized Receiver. Bragg Cell Receiver. Compressive Receiver. Digital Recievers. Receiver Systems. Receiver Sensitivity. FM Sensitivity. Digital Sensitivity. EW Processing - Processing Tasks. Determining Values of Parameters. Deinterleaving. Operator Interface. Modern Aircraft Operator Interface. Operator Interface in Tactical ESM Systems. Search - Definitions and Parametric Constraints. Narrowband Frequency Search Strategies. The Signal Environment. Look-Through. LPI Signals - Low-Probability-of Intercept Signals. Frequency-Hopping Signals. Chirp Signals. Direct-Sequence Spread-Spectrum Signals. Some Real-World Considerations. Emitter Location - The Role of Emitter Location. Emitter Location Geometry. Emitter Location Accuracy. Amplitude-Based Emitter Location. Interferometer Direction Finding. Interferometric DF Implementation. Direction Finding Using the Doppler Principle. Time of Arrival Emitter Location. Jamming - Classifications of Jamming. Jamming-to-Signal Ratio. Burn-Through. Cover Jamming. Range Deceptive Jamming. Inverse Gain Jamming. AGC Jamming. Velocity Gate Pull-Off. Deceptive Techniques Against Monopulse Radars. Decoys - Types of Decoys. RCS and Reflected Power. Passive Decoys. Active Decoys. Saturation Decoys. Seduction Decoys. Effective RCS Through an Engagement. Simulation - Definitions. Computer Simulation. Engagement Scenario Model. Operation Interface Simulation. Practical Considerations in Operator Interface Simulation. Emulation. Antenna Emulation. Receiver Emulation. Threat Emulation. Threat Antenna-Pattern Emulation. Multiple-Signal Emulation. Appendix A. About the Author. Index.

    2 in stock

    £100.80

  • The Pipe Fitters and Pipe Welders Handbook

    McGraw-Hill Education - Europe The Pipe Fitters and Pipe Welders Handbook

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisThis handy reference is an ideal companion to Pipe Trades Pocket Manual by the same author. This book enables pipefitters to solve difficult problems they will face in their work by providing instructions and calculations for common and unusual tasks.

    15 in stock

    £26.11

  • RealTime Stability Assessment in Modern Power

    John Wiley & Sons Inc RealTime Stability Assessment in Modern Power

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisThis book answers the need for a practical, hands-on guide for assessing power stability in real time, rather than in offline simulations. Since the book is primarily geared toward the practical aspects of the subject, theoretical background is reduced to the strictest minimum. For the benefit of readers who may not be quite familiar with the underlying theoretical techniques, appendices describing key algorithms and theoretical issues are included at the end of the book. It is an excellent source for researchers, professionals, and advanced undergraduate and graduate students.Table of ContentsPreface. Contributors. 1 The Real-Time and Study-Mode Data Environment in Modern SCADA/EMS (Sudhir Virmani and Savu C. Savulescu). 1.1 Introduction. 1.2 SCADA/EMS Architectures. 1.3 Integrating Stability Applications with the SCADA/EMS. 1.4 References. 2 Overview of Key Stability Concepts Applied for Real-Time Operations (Savu C. Savulescu). 2.1 Introduction. 2.2 In Search of the Stability Limits. 2.3 Transient and Voltage Stability Limits. 2.4 Steady-State Stability Limits. 2.5 Concluding Remarks. 2.6 References. Annex 1-1. Reactive Power Steady-State Stability Criterion dΔQ/dV. 3 LIPA Implementation of Real-Time Stability Monitoring in a CIM Compliant Environment (Loris Arnold, Janos Hajagos, Susan M. Manessis, and Anie Philip). 3.1 Introduction. 3.2 Static and Dynamic Security Assessment at LIPA. 3.3 Benchmarking the Real-Time Stability Application. 3.4 Practical Experience and Outlook. 3.5 References. 4 Real-Time Stability Monitoring at the Independent System Operator in Bosnia and Herzegovina (Dusko Vickovic and Roland Eichler). 4.1 Introduction. 4.2 Interim Implementation of Real-Time Stability Assessment at NOS BiH. 4.3 Real-Time Stability Assessment in the New SCADA/EMS Environment. 4.4 Conclusions and Recommendations. 4.5 References. Annex 4-1. TSL, TTC, and the Stability Envelope. Annex 4-2. Siemens Implementation of the Continuation Power Flow. 5 Experience with Real-Time Stability Assessment at Transelectrica (Horia S. Campeanu, Cornel Erbasu, and Cornel Aldea). 5.1 Introduction. 5.2 Security Assessment Philosophy and Criteria. 5.3 Real-Time Steady-State Stability Assessment and Monitoring. 5.4 Off-Line Stability Tools in Support of System Operations. 5.5 Conclusions and Outlook. 5.6 References. 6 Implementation of Online Dynamic Security Assessment at Southern Company (Kip Morison, Lei Wang, Fred Howell, James Viikinsalo, and Alan Martin). 6.1 Introduction. 6.2 DSA Implementation Fundamentals. 6.3 Transient Security Assessment Implementation at Southern Company. 6.4 Conclusions. 6.5 References. Annex 6-1. Further Details of the DSA Software and Hardware Architecture. Description of the Core DSA Software. Online DSA Implementation Using DSATools. 7 Online Security Assessment for the Brazilian System?A Detailed Modeling Approach (Jorge L. Jardim). 7.1 Introduction. 7.2 Security Criteria and Functions. 7.3 Solution Methods and Architecture. 7.4 Practical Implementation Aspects. 7.5 User Interface And Performance. 7.6 Concluding Remarks. 7.7 Acknowledgments. 7.8 References. 8 Dynamic Network Security Analysis in a Load Dispatch Center (Guenther Beissler, Olaf Ruhle, and Roland Eichler). 8.1 Introduction. 8.2 Siemens Approach to Dynamic Security Assessment. 8.3 Case Studies: Challenges, Implementation Approach, and Solution Features. 8.4 References. Annex 8-1. Further Dynamic Simulation Capabilities. Time Frame for Dynamic Simulations. Simulation in the Frequency Domain. Eigenvalue and Modal Analysis. 9 Real-Time Transient Security Assessment in Australia at NEMMCO (Stephen J. Boroczky). 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Transient Security Assessment at NEMMCO. 9.3 Performance and Reliability. 9.4 Experience, Benefits, and Outlook. 9.5 References. 10 Online Voltage Security Assessment in the Hellenic Interconnected System (Costas Vournas, George Christoforidis, and Thierry Van Cutsem). 10.1 Introduction. 10.2 The Control Center of HTSO. 10.3 Online VSA in the Hellenic System. 10.4 Use of Online VSA For Arming Load-Shedding Protection. 10.5 Conclusion. 10.6 References. Annex 10-1. Quasi-Steady-State Simulation. Principle of the QSS Approximation. Handling of Frequency in QSS Simulation. QSS Model of the Synchronous Machine and its Regulations. Numerical Integration of the QSS Model. 11 The Real-Time Supervision of Transmission Capacity in the Swedish Grid (Lars Sandberg and Klas Roudén). 11.1 Introduction. 11.2 Prior and Current Application Development at SVK. 11.3 Voltage Security Assessment with SPICA. 11.4 Benefiting from the Knowledge of the Current Transmission Capacity. 11.5 Additional SPICA Functionality. 11.6 Summary. Appendix A Dimo?s Approach to Steady-State Stability Assessment: Methodology Overview, Numerical Example, and Algorithm Validation (Roberto D. Molina Mylius, Martín Cassano, and Savu C. Savulescu). A.1 Methodology Overview. A.2 Numerical Example?Independent Testing of Algorithm Implementation. A.3 Benchmarking the Methodology. A.4 Conclusions. A.5 References. Appendix B SIME: A Comprehensive Approach to Transient Stability (Mania Pavella, Daniel Ruiz-Vega, and Mevludin Glavic). B.1 Introduction. B.2 Basic Formulation. B.3 Preventive SIME. B.4 Emergency SIME. B.5 Postface. B.6 References. Notation. Abbreviations and Acronyms. Appendix C Detection and Evaluation of Stability Constrained (Marius Pomarleanu and Savu C. Savulescu). C.1 Introduction. C.2 Approach. C.3 Conclusions. C.4 References. Index.

    15 in stock

    £116.96

  • Electronics For Dummies UK Edition

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Electronics For Dummies UK Edition

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisDo you dream of wiring up a flashing LED, experimenting with infrared detectors, or building a walking-talking robot from scratch? This book covers everything from understanding the technology behind day-to-day gadgets, to reading a schematic, getting to grips with multimeters, and devising projects that are both useful and fun.Table of ContentsIntroduction 1 Part I: Understanding the Fundamentals of Electronics 7 Chapter 1: What Is Electronics and What Can It Do for You? 9 Chapter 2: Manipulating Electricity to Make Something Happen 19 Chapter 3: Meeting Up with Resistance 37 Chapter 4: Getting a Charge Out of Capacitors 63 Chapter 5: Curling Up with Coils and Crystals 89 Chapter 6: The Wide World of Semiconductors 109 Chapter 7: Cramming Components into Chips 139 Chapter 8: Rounding Out Your Parts List 163 Part II: Getting Your Hands Dirty 187 Chapter 9: Setting Up Shop and Staying Safe 189 Chapter 10: Sussing out Schematics 213 Chapter 11: Constructing Circuits 233 Chapter 12: Measuring and Analysing Circuits 255 Part III: Putting Theory into Practice 279 Chapter 13: Exploring Some Simple Circuits 281 Chapter 14: Great Projects You Can Build in 30 Minutes or Less 305 Part IV: The Part of Tens 329 Chapter 15: Ten Exciting Electronics Extras 331 Chapter 16: Ten Great Sources for Electronics Parts 341 Appendix: Internet Resources 345 Index 349

    15 in stock

    £15.29

  • Circuitbuilding DoItYourself for Dummies

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Circuitbuilding DoItYourself for Dummies

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisDO-IT-YOURSELF Here''s the fun and easy way to start building circuits for your projects Have you ever wanted to build your own electronic device? Put together a thermostat or an in-line fuse, or repair a microphone cable? This is the book for you! Inside you''ll find the tools and techniques you need to build circuits, with illustrated, step-by-step directions to help accomplish tasks and complete projects. As you accomplish the tasks throughout the book, you''ll construct many projects while learning the key circuitbuilding principles and techniques. Find out about measuring and testing, maintenance and troubleshooting, cables, connectors, how to test your stuff, and more. Stuff You Need to Know * The tools you need and how to use them * How to make sense of schematics and printed circuit boards * Basic techniques for creating any circuit * How to make and rTable of ContentsIntroduction 1 Part I: Working Basics for Electronic-ers 5 Chapter 1: The Toolbox 7 Chapter 2: Basic Techniques 23 Part II: Building Circuits 41 Chapter 3: Using a Solderless Breadboard 43 Chapter 4: Building a Printed Circuit Board 59 Chapter 5: Building a Prototype 73 Chapter 6: Building from a Published Schematic 95 Part III: Cables and Connectors 127 Chapter 7: Terminals and Connectors 129 Chapter 8: Wiring for Wireless Radio 159 Chapter 9: Mastering Power 185 Chapter 10: Audio and Sensitive Connections 205 Part IV: Measuring and Testing 231 Chapter 11: Meet the Test Equipment 233 Chapter 12: Measurements That Test Your Circuits and Projects 251 Part V: Maintaining Electronic Equipment 287 Chapter 13: Who Let the Smoke Out? 289 Chapter 14: Maintaining Your Cool (Stuff) 307 Chapter 15: Getting a Charge Out of Batteries 317 Chapter 16: Electronics in Motion 329 Chapter 17: Getting Rid of Interference and Noise 337 Part VI: The Part of Tens 347 Chapter 18: Ten Circuitbuilding Secrets 349 Chapter 19: Ten Circuit First-Aid Techniques and Supplies 353 Glossary 357 Appendix A: Circuitbuilding Resources 365 Index 373

    15 in stock

    £16.99

  • Computer Analysis of Power Systems

    Wiley Computer Analysis of Power Systems

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisDescribes the main computer modelling techniques that constitute the basic framework of modern power system analysis. Basic knowledge of power system theory, matrix analysis and numerical techniques is presumed, although appendices and references are included to provide the relevant background.Table of ContentsLoad Flow. Three-Phase Load Flow. A.C.-D.C. Load Flow. Faulted System Studies. Power System Stability--Basic Model. Power System Stability--Advanced Component Modeling. Analysis of Electromagnetic Transients. Analysis of Harmonic Propagation. Analysis of System Optimization and Security. A Graphical Power System Analysis Package. Appendices. Index.

    15 in stock

    £334.76

  • Reliability in Procurement and Use

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Reliability in Procurement and Use

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisDetails all the issues and applications of reliability engineering relevant to the use and purchase of equipment. Introduces reliability terminology for the non-specialist. Discusses product procurement based on life cycle cost, the total expenditure of ownership as opposed to merely acquisition, procurement dependability specifications, equipment inspection frequency, optimization of replacement, overhaul tactics and schedules. Explains how to collect, analyze and monitor field failure data in order to build up dependable reliability data banks for future use.Table of ContentsPartial table of contents: Reliability Basics. Probability Concepts and Applications. Mean Time to Failure and Mean Time Between Failures. LIFE CYCLE COST PROCUREMENT. Life Cycle Cost: Concepts, Constituents and Models. Dependability and Life Cycle Cost. PROCUREMENT SPECIFICATIONS. Allocation of Subsystem Dependability Needs. COMPARATIVE PRODUCT EVALUATION. Product Selection and Evaluation. FAILURE REPORTING AND DATA ANALYSIS. Failure Reporting and Analysis. Aging Analysis of Repairable Equipment. INSPECTION FREQUENCY OPTIMIZATION. Inspection Frequency Optimization. REPLACEMENT AND OVERHAUL POLICIES. Replacement Policies: Concepts, Methods and Models. Replacement with Ongoing Technological Change. Appendices. Selected Bibliography. Index.

    15 in stock

    £385.16

  • Fundamentals of Semiconductor Manufacturing and

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Fundamentals of Semiconductor Manufacturing and

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisFundamentals of Semiconductor Manufacturing and Process Control examines in detail the methodology by which electronic materials and supplies are converted into finished integrated circuits, and electronic products in a high-volume manufacturing environment.Trade Review"…offers insight into the IC manufacturing process…[to] the practicing engineer or interested professional." (IEEE Circuits & Devices Magazine, November/December 2006)Table of ContentsPreface. Acknowledgments. 1. Introduction to Semiconductor Manufacturing. Objectives. Introduction. 1.1. Historical Evolution. 1.2. Modern Semiconductor Manufacturing. 1.3. Goals of Manufacturing. 1.4. Manufacturing Systems. 1.5. Outline for Remainder of the Book. Summary. Problems. References. 2. Technology Overview. Objectives. Introduction. 2.1. Unit Processes. 2.2. Process Integration. Summary. Problems. References. 3. Process Monitoring. Objectives. Introduction. 3.1. Process Flow and Key Measurement Points. 3.2. Wafer State Measurements. 3.3. Equipment State Measurements. Summary. Problems. References. 4. Statistical Fundamentals. Objectives. Introduction. 4.1. Probability Distributions. 4.2. Sampling from a Normal Distribution. 4.3. Estimation 4.4. Hypothesis Testing. Summary. Problems. Reference. 5. Yield Modeling. Objectives. Introduction. 5.1. Definitions of Yield Components. 5.2. Functional Yield Models. 5.3. Functional Yield Model Components. 5.4. Parametric Yield. 5.5. Yield Simulation. 5.6. Design Centering. 5.7. Process Introduction and Time-to-Yield. Summary. Problems. References. 6. Statistical Process Control. Objectives. Introduction. 6.1. Control Chart Basics. 6.2. Patterns in Control Charts. 6.3. Control Charts for Attributes. 6.4. Control Charts for Variables. 6.5. Multivariate Control. 6.6. SPC with Correlated Process Data. Summary. Problems. References. 7. Statistical Experimental Design. Objectives. Introduction. 7.1. Comparing Distributions. 7.2. Analysis of Variance. 7.3. Factorial Designs. 7.4. Taguchi Method. Summary. Problems. References. 8. Process Modeling. Objectives. Introduction. 8.1. Regression Modeling. 8.2. Response Surface Methods. 8.3. Evolutionary Operation. 8.4. Principal-Component Analysis. 8.5. Intelligent Modeling Techniques. 8.6. Process Optimization. Summary. Problems. References. 9. Advanced Process Control. Objectives. Introduction. 9.1. Run-by-Run Control with Constant Term Adaptation. 9.2. Multivariate Control with Complete Model Adaptation. 9.3. Supervisory Control. Summary. Problems. References. 10. Process and Equipment Diagnosis. Objectives. Introduction. 10.1. Algorithmic Methods. 10.2. Expert Systems. 10.3. Neural Network Approaches. 10.4. Hybrid Methods. Summary. Problems. References. Appendix A: Some Properties of the Error Function. Appendix B: Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution. Appendix C: Percentage Points of the χ2 Distribution. Appendix D: Percentage Points of the t Distribution. Appendix E: Percentage Points of the F Distribution. Appendix F: Factors for Constructing Variables Control Charts. Index.

    15 in stock

    £97.16

  • Radar Principles

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Radar Principles

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisAn advanced treatment of the main concepts of radar. Systematic and organized, it nicely balances readability with mathematical rigor.Table of ContentsPartial table of contents: RADAR MEASUREMENTS. Delay and Range. Doppler Shift and Range Rate. CROSS SECTION OF RADAR TARGETS. Spheres. Radar Cross Section of Antennas. RADAR DETECTION. Integration. Binary Integration and Cumulative Probabilities. GROUND EFFECTS-MULTIPATH AND CLUTTER. The Rayleigh Criterion. Multipath Propagation. THE MATCHED FILTER. Example of a Matched Filter. Complex Representation of Bandpass Signals. THE AMBIGUITY FUNCTION. Proving Rules (a)-(d) of the Ambiguity Function. THE AMBIGUITY FUNCTION OF BASIC SIGNALS. Single-frequency Pulse. Coherent Pulse Train. CODED RADAR SIGNALS. Frequency coding (Costas Signals). Phase Coding. ACCURACY OF RADAR MEASUREMENTS. Delay Estimation Using the Signal Envelope. Measurement Accuracy and the Ambiguity Function. PROCESSING A COHERENT PULSE TRAIN. I & Q Sampling. Imbalance inthe I & Q Channels. MOVING-TARGET INDICATOR (MTI). Clutter Spectrum. Double Canceller. CONSTANT FALSE-ALARM RATE (CFAR). Cell-averaging CFAR. Cluttered Map CFAR. SYNTHETIC APERTURE RADAR (SAR). Phase and Frequency History of a Point Target. Range Migration. MONOPULSE ANTENNA TRACKING. Monopulse Systems. Monopulse Accuracy. Index.

    15 in stock

    £170.06

  • Aeronautical Radio Communication Systems and

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Aeronautical Radio Communication Systems and

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisThis text is unique in providing a broad overview of the latest aeronautical radio communication systems, as well as looking forward to future developments. The book is divided into three clear parts: Theory, System Level and Practicalities which covers the basic theory and physics governing aeronautical radio systems and networks.Table of ContentsPreface xvii Dedications xviii About the Author xviii Revisions, Corrections, Updates, Liability xix Book Layout and Structure xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 The Legacy 1 1.2 Today and the Second Generation of Equipment 1 1.3 The Future 3 1.4 Operational and User Changes 3 1.5 Radio Spectrum Used by Aviation 4 1.6 Discussion of the Organizational Structure of Aviation Communications Disciplines 6 2 Theory Governing Aeronautical Radio Systems 9 Summary 9 2.1 Basic Definitions 10 2.2 Propagation Fundamentals 11 2.3 Power, Amplitudes and the Decibel Scale 14 2.4 The Isotropic Power Source and Free Space Path Loss 15 2.5 Radio Geometry 19 2.6 Complex Propagation: Refraction, Absorption, Non-LOS Propagation 25 2.7 Other Propagation Effects 37 2.8 Modulation 38 2.9 Shannon’s Theory 62 2.10 Multiplexing and Trunking 62 2.11 Access Schemes 66 2.12 Mitigation Techniques for Fading and Multipath 71 2.13 Bandwidth Normalization 77 2.14 Antenna Gain 80 2.15 The Link Budget 87 2.16 Intermodulation 88 2.17 Noise in a Communication System 92 2.18 Satellite Theory 93 2.19 Availability and Reliability 99 Further Reading 104 3 VHF Communication 105 Summary 105 3.1 History 105 3.2 DSB-AM Transceiver at a System Level 110 3.3 Dimensioning a Mobile Communications System–The Three Cs 113 3.4 Regulatory and Licensing Aspects 123 3.5 VHF ‘Hardening’ and Intermodulation 125 3.6 The VHF Datalink 126 Further Reading 143 4 Military Communication Systems 145 Summary 145 4.1 Military VHF Communications – The Legacy 145 4.2 After the Legacy 146 4.3 The Shortfalls of the Military VHF Communication System 147 4.4 The Requirement for a New Tactical Military System 147 4.5 The Birth of JTIDS/MIDS 147 4.6 Technical Definitionof JTIDS and MIDS 148 5 Long-Distance Mobile Communications 157 Summary 157 5.1 High-Frequency Radio – The Legacy 157 5.2 Allocation and Allotment 158 5.3 HF System Features 158 5.4 HF Datalink System 162 5.5 Applications of Aeronautical HF 163 5.6 Mobile Satellite Communications 165 5.7 Comparison Between VHF, HF, L Band (JTIDS/MIDS) and Satellite Mobile Communications 175 5.8 Aeronautical Passenger Communications 175 Further Reading 175 6 Aeronautical Telemetry Systems 177 Summary 177 6.1 Introduction – The Legacy 177 6.2 Existing Systems 178 6.3 Productivity and Applications 182 6.4 Proposed Airbus Future Telemetry System 183 6.5 Unmanned Aerial Vehicles 185 7 Terrestrial Backhaul and the Aeronautical Telecommunications Network 187 Summary 187 7.1 Introduction 187 7.2 Types of Point-to-point Bearers 188 8 Future Aeronautical Mobile Communication Systems 201 Summary 201 8.1 Introduction 202 8.2 Near-term Certainties 202 8.3 Longer Term Options 210 Further Reading 219 9 The Economics of Radio 221 Summary 221 9.1 Introduction 221 9.2 Basic Rules of Economics 221 9.3 Analysis and the Break-even Point 222 9.4 The Cost of Money 222 9.5 The Safety Case 225 9.6 Reliability Cost 226 9.7 Macroeconomics 227 10 Ground Installations and Equipment 229 Summary 229 10.1 Introduction 229 10.2 Practical Equipment VHF Communication Band (118–137 MHz) 233 10.3 Outdoor 245 11 Avionics 259 Summary 259 11.1 Introduction 259 11.2 Environment 259 11.3 Types of Aircraft 268 11.4 Simple Avionics for Private Aviation 272 11.5 The Distributed Avionics Concept 273 11.6 Avionic Racking Arrangements 282 11.7 Avionic Boxes 284 11.8 Antennas 294 11.9 Mastering the Co-site Environment 301 11.10 Data Cables, Power Cables, Special Cables, Coaxial Cables 303 11.11 Certification and Maintaining Airworthiness 303 Further Reading 304 12 Interference, Electromagnetic Compatibility, Spectrum Management and Frequency Management 307 Summary 307 12.1 Introduction 308 12.2 Interference 308 12.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility 314 12.4 Spectrum Management Process 318 12.5 Frequency Management Process 322 Further Reading 324 Appendix 1 Summary of All Equations (Constants, Variables and Conversions) 325 Appendix 2 List of Symbols and Variables from Equations 333 Appendix 3 List of Constants 335 Appendix 4 Unit Conversions 337 Appendix 5 List of Abbreviations 339 Index 345

    15 in stock

    £98.06

  • A Project Managers Book of Forms

    John Wiley & Sons Inc A Project Managers Book of Forms

    Out of stock

    Book SynopsisEssential project management forms aligned to the PMBOK GuideSixth Edition A Project Manager''s Book of Forms is an essential companion to the Project Management Institute''s A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge. Packed with ready-made forms for managing every stage in any project, this book offers both new and experienced project managers an invaluable resource for thorough documentation and repeatable processes. Endorsed by PMI and aligned with the PMBOK Guide, these forms cover all aspects of initiating, planning, executing, monitoring and controlling, and closing; each form can be used as-is directly from the book, or downloaded from the companion website and tailored to your project''s unique needs. This new third edition has been updated to align with the newest PMBOK Guide, and includes forms for agile, the PMI Talent Triangle, technical project management, leadership, straTable of ContentsAcknowledgments vii Introduction ix New for this Edition ix Audience ix Organization x 1 Initiating Forms 1 1.0 Initiating Process Group 1 1.1 Project Charter 2 1.2 Assumption Log 9 1.3 Stakeholder Register 12 1.4 Stakeholder Analysis 15 2 Planning Forms 17 2.0 Planning Process Group 17 2.1 Project Management Plan 20 2.2 Change Management Plan 25 2.3 Project Roadmap 28 2.4 Scope Management Plan 30 2.5 Requirements Management Plan 33 2.6 Requirements Documentation 37 2.7 Requirements Traceability Matrix 40 2.8 Project Scope Statement 45 2.9 Work Breakdown Structure 49 2.10 WBS Dictionary 52 2.11 Schedule Management Plan 56 2.12 Activity List 59 2.13 Activity Attributes 62 2.14 Milestone List 65 2.15 Network Diagram 67 2.16 Duration Estimates 70 2.17 Duration Estimating Worksheet 73 2.18 Project Schedule 78 2.19 Cost Management Plan 82 2.20 Cost Estimates 85 2.21 Cost Estimating Worksheet 88 2.22 Cost Baseline 93 2.23 Quality Management Plan 95 2.24 Quality Metrics 99 2.25 Responsibility Assignment Matrix 101 2.26 Resource Management Plan 104 2.27 Team Charter 109 2.28 Resource Requirements 113 2.29 Resource Breakdown Structure 116 2.30 Communications Management Plan 118 2.31 Risk Management Plan 121 2.32 Risk Register 128 2.33 Risk Report 131 2.34 Probability and Impact Assessment 137 2.35 Probability and Impact Matrix 142 2.36 Risk Data Sheet 144 2.37 Procurement Management Plan 147 2.38 Procurement Strategy 152 2.39 Source Selection Criteria 155 2.40 Stakeholder Engagement Plan 158 3 Executing Forms 163 3.0 Executing Process Group 163 3.1 Issue Log 165 3.2 Decision Log 168 3.3 Change Request 170 3.4 Change Log 175 3.5 Lessons Learned Register 178 3.6 Quality Audit 181 3.7 Team Performance Assessment 184 4 Monitoring and Controlling Forms 189 4.0 Monitoring and Controlling Process Group 189 4.1 Team Member Status Report 191 4.2 Project Status Report 196 4.3 Variance Analysis 202 4.4 Earned Value Analysis 206 4.5 Risk Audit 209 4.6 Contractor Status Report 213 4.7 Procurement Audit 218 4.8 Contract Closeout Report 222 4.9 Product Acceptance Form 226 5 Closing 229 5.0 Closing Process Group 229 5.1 Lessons Learned Summary 229 5.2 Project or Phase Closeout 235 6 Agile 239 6.1 Product Vision 240 6.2 Product Backlog 242 6.3 Release Plan 244 6.4 Retrospective 246 Index 249

    Out of stock

    £64.76

  • Schaums Outline of Electric Circuits Seventh

    McGraw-Hill Education Schaums Outline of Electric Circuits Seventh

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisTough Test Questions? Missed Lectures? Not Enough Time? Textbook too Pricey?Fortunately, there's Schaum's. This all-in-one-package includes more than 500 fully-solved problems, examples, and practice exercises to sharpen your problem-solving skills. Plus, you will have access to 25 detailed videos featuring math instructors who explain how to solve the most commonly tested problemsâit's just like having your own virtual tutor! You'll find everything you need to build your confidence, skills, and knowledge and achieve the highest score possible.More than 40 million students have trusted Schaum's to help them study faster, learn better, and get top grades. Now Schaum's is better than ever-with a new look, a new format with hundreds of practice problems, and completely updated information to conform to the latest developments in every field of study. Each Outline presents all the essential course information in an easy-to-follow, topic-by-topic format andTable of Contents1. Introduction2. Circuit Concepts 3. Circuit Laws4. Analysis Methods5. Amplifiers and Operational Amplifier Circuits6. Waveforms and Signals7. First-Order Circuits8. Higher-Order Circuits and Complex Frequency9. Sinusoidal Steady-State Circuit Analysis10. AC Power11. Polyphase Circuits12. Frequency Response, Filters, and Resonance13. Two-Port Networks14. Mutual Inductance and Transformers15. Circuit Analysis Using Spice and Pspice16. The LaPlace Transform Method17. Fourier Method of Waveform AnalysisAppendix A Complex Number SystemAppendix B Matrices and Determinants

    15 in stock

    £14.39

  • Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers

    McGraw-Hill Education Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers

    3 in stock

    Book SynopsisPublisher's Note: Products purchased from Third Party sellers are not guaranteed by the publisher for quality, authenticity, or access to any online entitlements included with the product.Up-to-date coverage of every facet of electric power in a single volumeThis fully revised, industry-standard resource offers practical details on every aspect of electric power engineering. The book contains in-depth discussions from more than 100 internationally recognized experts. Generation, transmission, distribution, operation, system protection, and switchgear are thoroughly explained. Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers, Seventeenth Edition, features brand-new sections on measurement and instrumentation, interconnected power grids, smart grids and

    3 in stock

    £177.29

  • Power System Dynamics with ComputerBased Modeling

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Power System Dynamics with ComputerBased Modeling

    3 in stock

    Book SynopsisA unique combination of theoretical knowledge and practical analysis experience Derived from Yoshihide Hase?s Handbook of Power Systems Engineering, 2nd Edition, this book provides readers with everything they need to know about power system dynamics. Presented in three parts, it covers power system theories, computation theories, and how prevailed engineering platforms can be utilized for various engineering works. It features many illustrations based on ETAP to help explain the knowledge within as much as possible. Recompiling all the chapters from the previous book, Power System Dynamics with Computer Based Modeling and Analysis offers nineteen new and improved content with updated information and all new topics, including two new chapters on circuit analysis which help engineers with non-electrical engineering backgrounds. Topics covered include: Essentials of Electromagnetism; Complex Number Notation (Symbolic Method) and Laplace-trTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xxix Preface xxxi Acknowledgments xxxiii Part A Power Systems Theories and Practices 1 1 Essentials of Electromagnetism 3 1.1 Overview 3 1.2 Voltage, Current, Electric Power, and Resistance 3 1.3 Electromagnetic Induction (Faraday’s Law) 4 1.4 Self Inductance and Mutual Inductance 6 1.5 Mutual Capacitance 7 2 Complex Number Notation (Symbolic Method) and the Laplace Transform 11 2.1 Euler’s Formula 11 2.2 Complex Number Notation of Electricity Based on Euler’s Formula 12 2.3 LR Circuit Transient Calculation Using Complex Number Notation and the Laplace Transform 14 2.4 LCR Circuit Transient Calculation 16 2.5 Resistive, Inductive, and Capacitive Load, and Phasor Expressions 21 3 Transmission Line Matrices and Symmetrical Components 25 3.1 Overhead Transmission Lines with Inductive LR Constants 25 3.2 Overhead Transmission Lines with Capacitive C Constants 30 3.3 Symmetrical Coordinate Method (Symmetrical Components) 32 3.4 Conversion of a Three-Phase Circuit into a Symmetrical Coordinated Circuit 39 3.5 Transmission Lines by Symmetrical Components 39 3.6 Generator by Symmetrical Components (Simplified Description) 47 3.7 Description of a Three-Phase Load Circuit by Symmetrical Components 49 4 Physics of Transmission Lines and Line Constants 51 4.1 Inductance 51 4.2 Capacitance and Leakage Current 59 4.3 Actual Configuration of Overhead Transmission Lines 66 4.4 Special Properties of Working Inductance and Working Capacitance 68 4.5 MKS Rational Unit System 71 5 The Per-Unit Method 77 5.1 Fundamental Concepts of the PU Method 77 5.2 PU Method for a Single-Phase Circuit 77 5.3 PU Method for Three-Phase Circuits 79 5.4 Base Quantity Modification of Unitized Impedance 80 5.5 Unitized Symmetrical Circuit: Numerical Example 81 6 Transformer Modeling 91 6.1 Single-Phase Three-Winding Transformer 91 6.2 − − Δ-Connected Three-Phase, Three-Winding Transformer 95 6.3 Three-Phase Transformers with Various Winding Connections 101 6.4 Autotransformers 105 6.5 On-Load Tap-Changing Transformer (LTC Transformer) 107 6.6 Phase-Shifting Transformer 109 6.7 Woodbridge Transformers and Scott Transformers 113 6.8 Neutral Grounding Transformer 116 6.9 Transformer Magnetic Characteristics and Inrush Current Phenomena 118 7 Fault Analysis Based on Symmetrical Components 127 7.1 Fundamental Concepts of Fault Analysis Based on the Symmetrical Coordinate Method 127 7.2 Line-to-Ground Fault (Phase-a to Ground Fault: 1ϕG) 127 7.3 Fault Analysis at Various Fault Modes 132 7.4 Conductor Opening 137 7.5 Visual Vector Diagrams of Voltages and Currents under Fault Conditions 139 7.6 Three-Phase-Order Misconnections 151 8 Fault Analysis with the αβ0-Method 155 8.1 αβ0-Method (Clarke-Components) 155 8.2 Fault Analysis with αβ0-Components 166 8.3 Advantages of the αβ0-Method 171 8.4 Fault-Transient Analysis with Symmetrical Components and the αβ0-Method 171 9 Power Cables 175 9.1 Structural Features of Power Cables 175 9.2 Circuit Constants of Power Cables 183 9.3 Metallic Sheaths and Outer Coverings 190 10 Synchronous Generators, Part 1: Circuit Theory 195 10.1 Generator Model in a Phase abc-Domain 195 10.2 dq0 Method (dq0 Components) 203 10.3 Transformation of Generator Equations from the abc-Domain to the dq0-Domain 206 10.4 Physical Meanings of Generator Equations in the dq0-Domain 210 10.5 Generator dq0-Domain Equations 213 10.6 Generator dq0-Domain Equivalent Circuit 218 10.7 Generator Operating Characteristics and Vector Diagram on the d- and q-Axes Plane 220 10.8 Generator Transient Reactance 223 10.9 Symmetrical Equivalent Circuits of Generators 225 10.10 Laplace-Transformed Generator Equations and Time Constants 231 10.12 Relations Between the dq0-Domain and αβ0-Domain 239 10.13 Calculating Generator Short-Circuit Transient Current Under Load 239 11 Synchronous Generators, Part 2: Characteristics of Machinery 251 11.1 Apparent Power P + jQ in the abc-, 012-, dq0-Domains 251 11.2 Mechanical (Kinetic) Power and Generating (Electrical) Power 257 11.3 Kinetic Equation for Generators 259 11.4 Generator Operating Characteristics with P-Q (or p-q) Coordinates 269 11.5 Generator Ratings and Capability Curves 271 11.6 Generator’s Locus in the pq-Coordinate Plane under Various Operating Conditions 275 11.7 Leading Power-Factor (Under-Excitation Domain) Operation, and UEL Function by AVR 277 11.8 Operation at Over-Excitation (Lagging Power-Factor Operation) 282 11.9 Thermal Generators’ Weak Points (Negative-Sequence Current, Higher Harmonic Current, Shaft-Torsional Distortion) 282 11.10 Transient Torsional Twisting Torque of a TG Coupled Shaft 287 11.11 General Description of Modern Thermal/Nuclear TG Units 290 12 Steady-State, Transient, and Dynamic Stability 297 12.1 P-δ Curves and Q-δ Curves 297 12.2 Power Transfer Limits of Grid-Connected Generators (Steady-State Stability) 299 12.3 Transient Stability 306 12.4 Dynamic Stability 309 12.5 Four-Terminal Circuit and the P − δ Curve under Fault Conditions 310 12.6 P-δ Curve under Various Fault-Mode Conditions 312 12.7 PQV Characteristics and Voltage Instability (Voltage Avalanche) 313 12.8 Generator Characteristics with an AVR 319 12.9 Generator Operation Limit With and Without an AVR in PQ Coordinates 330 12.10 VQ (Voltage and Reactive Power) Control with an AVR 332 13 Induction Generators and Motors (Induction Machines) 337 13.1 Introduction to Induction Motors and Generators 337 13.2 Doubly Fed Induction Generators and Motors 337 13.3 Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors 355 13.4 Proportional Relations of Mechanical Quantities and Electrical Quantities as a Basis of Power-Electronic Control 367 14 Directional Distance Relays and R–X Diagrams 371 14.1 Overview of Protective Relays 371 14.2 Directional Distance Relays (DZ-Ry) and R–X Coordinate Plane 372 14.3 R–X Diagram Locus under Fault Conditions 375 14.4 Impedance Locus under Ordinary Load Conditions and Step-Out Conditions 381 14.5 Impedance Locus Under Faults with Load-Flow Conditions 385 14.6 Loss of Excitation Detection by Distance Relays (40-Relay) 386 15 Lightning and Switching Surge Phenomena and Breaker Switching 391 15.1 Traveling Wave on a Transmission Line, and Equations 391 15.2 Four-Terminal Network Equations between Two Arbitrary Points 398 15.3 Examination of Line Constants 399 15.4 Behavior of Traveling Waves at Transition Points 401 15.5 Surge Overvoltages and Their Three Different, Confusing Notations 404 15.6 Behavior of Traveling Waves at a Lightning-Strike Point 406 15.7 Traveling Wave Phenomena of Three-Phase Transmission Lines 408 15.8 Reflection Lattices and Transient Behavior Modes 413 15.9 Switching Surge Phenomena Caused by Breakers Tripping 415 15.10 Breaker Phase Voltages and Recovery Voltages after Fault Tripping 424 15.11 Three-Phase Breaker TRVs across Independent Poles 426 15.12 Circuit Breakers and Switching Practices 432 15.13 Switching Surge Caused by Line Switches (Disconnecting Switches) 452 15.14 Surge Phenomena Caused on Power Cable Systems 454 15.15 Lightning Surge Caused on Cable Lines 456 15.16 Switching Surge Caused on Cable Lines 458 15.17 Surge Voltages Caused on Cables and GIS Jointed Points 459 16 Overvoltage Phenomena 463 16.1 Neutral-Grounding Methods 463 16.2 Arc-Suppression Coil (Petersen Coil) Neutral-Grounded Method 467 16.3 Overvoltages Caused by a Line-to-Ground Fault 467 16.4 Other Low-Frequency Overvoltage Phenomena (Non-resonant Phenomena) 469 16.5 Lower-Frequency Resonant Overvoltages 472 16.6 Interrupted Ground Fault of a Cable Line in a Neutral-Ungrounded System 475 16.7 Switching Surge Overvoltages 475 16.8 Overvoltage Phenomena Caused by Lightning Strikes 477 17 Insulation Coordination 481 17.1 Overvoltages as Insulation Stresses 481 17.2 Classification of Overvoltages 483 17.3 Fundamental Process of Insulation Coordination 486 17.4 Countermeasures on Transmission Lines to Reduce Overvoltages and Flashover 487 17.5 Tower-Mounted Arrester Devices 489 17.6 Using Unequal Circuit Insulation (Double-Circuit Lines) 490 17.7 Using High-Speed Reclosing 490 17.8 Overvoltage Protection with Arresters at Substations 491 17.9 Station Protection Using OGWs and Reduced Grounding Resistance 499 17.10 Insulation Coordination Details 501 17.11 Transfer Surge Voltages through Transformers, and Generator Protection 509 17.12 Transformer Internal High-Frequency Voltage Oscillation Phenomena 518 17.13 Oil-Filled Transformers Versus Gas-Filled Transformers 524 18 Harmonics and Waveform Distortion Phenomena 527 18.1 Classification of Harmonics and Waveform Distortion 527 18.2 Impact of Harmonics 527 18.3 Harmonic Phenomena Caused by Power Cable Line Faults 529 19 Power Electronic Applications, Part 1: Devices 535 19.1 Fundamental Concepts of Power Electronics 535 19.2 Power Switching with Power Devices 535 19.3 Snubber Circuit 539 19.4 Voltage Conversion with Switching 540 19.5 Power Electronics Devices 542 19.6 Mathematical Background for Analyzing Power Electronics Applications 547 20 Power Electronics Applications, Part 2: Circuit Theory 553 20.1 AC-to-DC Conversion: A Rectifier with a Diode 553 20.2 AC-to-DC Controlled Conversion: Rectifier with a Thyristor 562 20.3 DC-to-DC Converters (DC-to-DC Choppers) 571 20.4 DC-to-AC Inverters 579 20.5 PWM Control of Inverters 583 20.6 AC-to-AC Converters (Cycloconverters) 587 21 Power Electronics Applications, Part 3: Control Theory 589 21.1 Introduction 589 21.2 Driving Motors 589 21.3 Static Var Compensators (SVC: A Thyristor-Based Approach) 597 21.4 Active Filters 603 21.5 Generator Excitation Systems 609 21.6 Adjustable-Speed Pumped-Storage Generator-Motor Units 610 21.7 Wind Generation 615 21.8 Small Hydro Generation 618 21.9 Solar Generation (Photovoltaic Generation) 619 21.10 High-Voltage DC Transmission (HVDC Transmission) 621 21.11 FACTS Technology 625 21.12 Railway Applications 62721.13 Uninterruptible Power Supplies 628Appendix A Mathematical Formulae 631Appendix B Matrix Equation Formulae 635 Part B Digital Computation Theories 639 22 Digital Computation Basics 641 22.1 Introduction 641 22.2 Network Types 642 22.3 Circuit Elements 645 22.4 Ohm’s Law 653 22.5 Kirchhoff’s Circuit Laws 655 22.6 Electrical Division Principle 656 22.7 Instantaneous, Average, and RMS Values 657 22.8 Nodal Formulation 658 22.9 Procedure for Mesh Analysis 662 22.10 Norton’s and Thévenin’s Equivalents 664 22.11 Maximum Power Transfer Theorem 668 22.13 Network Topology 675 22.14 Power System Matrices 681 22.15 Transformer Modeling 692 22.16 Transmission Line Modeling 696 23 Power-Flow Methods 701 23.1 Newton–Raphson Method 701 23.2 Gauss–Seidel Method 702 23.3 Adaptive Newton–Raphson Method 703 23.4 Fast-Decoupled Method 703 24 Short-Circuit Methods 705 24.1 ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods 705 24.2 IEC Calculation Methods 719 25 Harmonics 729 25.1 Problem Formulation 729 25.2 Methodology and Standards 733 25.3 Harmonic Indices 735 25.4 Harmonic Component Modeling 740 25.5 Power System Components 741 25.6 System Resonance 743 25.7 Harmonic Mitigation 744 26 Reliability 749 26.1 Methodology and Standards 749 26.2 Performance Indices 752 27 Numerical Integration Methods 755 27.1 Accuracy 755 27.2 Stability 755 27.3 Stiffness 757 27.4 Predictor–Corrector 757 27.5 Runge–Kutta 758 28 Optimization 761 28.1 Power-Flow Injections 761 28.2 Voltage Magnitude Constraints 762 28.3 Line-Flow Thermal Constraints 762 28.4 Line-Flow Constraints as Current Limitations 763 28.5 Line-Flow Constraints as Voltage Angle Constraints 763 Part C Analytical Practices and Examples using ETAP 765 29 Introduction to Power System Analysis 767 29.1 Planning Studies 767 29.2 Need for Power-System Analysis 768 29.3 Computers in Power Engineering 768 29.4 Study Approach 768 29.5 Operator Training 772 29.6 System Reliability and Maintenance 772 29.7 Electrical Transient Analyzer Program (ETAP) 772 30 One-Line Diagrams 777 30.1 Introduction 777 30.2 Engineering Parameters 777 30.3 One-Line Diagram Symbols 778 30.4 Power-System Configurations 780 30.5 Network Topology Processing 787 30.6 Illustrative Example – Per-Unit and Single-Line Diagram 790 31 Load Flow 791 31.1 Introduction 791 31.2 Study Objectives 791 31.3 Problem Formulation 792 31.4 Calculation Methodology 794 31.5 Required Data for ETAP 796 31.6 Data Collection and Preparation 797 31.7 Model Validation 797 31.8 Study Scenarios 799 31.9 Contingency Analysis 800 31.10 Optimal or Optimum Power Flow 801 31.11 Illustrative Examples 803 32 Short-Circuit/Fault Analysis 841 32.1 Introduction 841 32.2 Analysis Objectives 841 32.3 Methodology and Standards 846 32.4 Study Scenarios 855 32.5 Results and Reports 856 32.6 Illustrative Examples 858 33 Motor Starting 881 33.1 Methods 881 33.2 Analysis Objectives 893 33.3 Methodology and Standards 894 33.4 Required Data 902 33.5 Illustrative Examples 903 33.6 Motor-Starting Plots and Results 913 33.7 Motor-Starting Alerts 916 34 Harmonics 917 34.1 Introduction 917 34.2 Analysis Objectives 919 34.3 Required Data 921 34.4 Harmonic Load Flow and Frequency Scan 923 34.5 Illustrative Examples 924 35 Transient Stability 939 35.1 Introduction 939 35.2 Analysis Objectives 940 35.3 Basic Concepts of Transient Stability 942 35.4 Dynamic Models 944 35.5 User-Defined Models 967 35.6 Parameter Tuning 967 35.7 Single-Generator Power System Model 971 35.8 Data Collection and Preparation 973 35.9 Study Scenarios 974 35.10 Stability Improvement 977 35.11 System Simulation 977 35.12 Illustrative Examples 979 36 Reliability Assessment 1003 36.1 Introduction 1003 36.2 Analysis Objectives 1003 36.3 Problem Formulation 1004 36.4 Required Data 1005 36.5 Illustrative Examples 1005 37 Protective Device Coordination 1019 37.1 Introduction 1019 37.2 Relays 1022 37.3 Methodology 1028 37.4 Required Data 1035 37.5 Principle of Protection 1036 37.6 Principle of Selectivity/Coordination 1037 37.7 Art of Protection and Coordination >600 V 1040 37.8 Illustrative Examples 1048Appendix C Standards, Regulations, and Best Practice 1071 Further Reading 1083 Index 1085

    3 in stock

    £141.26

  • Principles of Solar Cells LEDs and Related

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Principles of Solar Cells LEDs and Related

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisThe second edition of the text that offers an introduction to the principles of solar cells and LEDs, revised and updated The revised and updated second edition of Principles of Solar Cells, LEDs and Related Devices offers an introduction to the physical concepts required for a comprehensive understanding of p-n junction devices, light emitting diodes and solar cells. The author a noted expert in the field presents information on the semiconductor and junction device fundamentals and extends it to the practical implementation of semiconductors in both photovoltaic and LED devices. In addition, the text offers information on the treatment of a range of important semiconductor materials and device structures including OLED devices and organic solar cells. This second edition contains a new chapter on the quantum mechanical description of the electron that will make the book accessible to students in any engineering discipline. The text also includes a neTable of ContentsIntroduction xi Acknowledgements xv 1 Introduction to Quantum Mechanics 1 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 The Classical Electron 2 1.3 Two Slit Electron Experiment 4 1.4 The Photoelectric Effect 7 1.5 Wave Packets and Uncertainty 10 1.6 The Wavefunction 12 1.7 The Schrödinger Equation 14 1.8 The Electron in a One-Dimensional Well 18 1.9 Electron Transmission and Reflection at Potential Energy Step 24 1.10 Expectation Values 26 1.11 Spin 26 1.12 The Pauli Exclusion Principle 29 1.13 Summary 30 Further Reading 32 Problems 33 2 Semiconductor Physics 37 2.1 Introduction 38 2.2 The Band Theory of Solids 38 2.3 Bloch Functions 40 2.4 The Kronig–Penney Model 42 2.5 The Bragg Model 47 2.6 Effective Mass 48 2.7 Number of States in a Band 50 2.8 Band Filling 52 2.9 Fermi Energy and Holes 53 2.10 Carrier Concentration 55 2.11 Semiconductor Materials 65 2.12 Semiconductor Band Diagrams 67 2.13 Direct Gap and Indirect Gap Semiconductors 72 2.14 Extrinsic Semiconductors 74 2.15 Carrier Transport in Semiconductors 79 2.16 Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Dynamics 83 2.17 Carrier Diffusion and the Einstein Relation 86 2.18 Quasi-Fermi Energies 88 2.19 The Diffusion Equation 91 2.20 Traps and Carrier Lifetimes 94 2.21 Alloy Semiconductors 98 2.22 Summary 100 References 103 Further Reading 103 Problems 105 3 The p–n Junction Diode 111 3.1 Introduction 112 3.2 Diode Current 113 3.3 Contact Potential 117 3.4 The Depletion Approximation 119 3.5 The Diode Equation 127 3.6 Reverse Breakdown and the Zener Diode 139 3.7 Tunnel Diodes 141 3.8 Generation/Recombination Currents 143 3.9 Metal–Semiconductor Junctions 145 3.10 Heterojunctions 156 3.11 Alternating Current (AC) and Transient Behaviour 157 3.12 Summary 159 Further Reading 160 Problems 161 4 Photon Emission and Absorption 165 4.1 Introduction to Luminescence and Absorption 166 4.2 Physics of Light Emission 167 4.3 Simple Harmonic Radiator 169 4.4 Quantum Description 170 4.5 The Exciton 174 4.6 Two-Electron Atoms 176 4.7 Molecular Excitons 184 4.8 Band-to-Band Transitions 186 4.9 Photometric Units 190 4.10 Summary 194 References 195 Further Reading 195 Problems 197 5 p–n Junction Solar Cells 201 5.1 Introduction 202 5.2 Light Absorption 204 5.3 Solar Radiation 207 5.4 Solar Cell Design and Analysis 207 5.5 Thin Solar Cells, G = 0 214 5.6 Thin Solar Cells, G > 0 218 5.7 Solar Cell Generation as a Function of Depth 220 5.8 Surface Recombination Reduction 224 5.9 Solar Cell Efficiency 225 5.10 Silicon Solar Cell Technology: Wafer Preparation 230 5.11 Silicon Solar Cell Technology: Solar Cell Finishing 233 5.12 Silicon Solar Cell Technology: Advanced Production Methods 237 5.13 Thin-Film Solar Cells: Amorphous Silicon 238 5.14 Telluride/Selenide/Sulphide Thin-Film Solar Cells 245 5.15 High-efficiency Multi-junction Solar Cells 247 5.16 Concentrating Solar Systems 251 5.17 Summary 253 References 254 Further Reading 255 Problems 257 6 Light-Emitting Diodes 265 6.1 Introduction 266 6.2 LED Operation and Device Structures 267 6.3 Emission Spectrum 269 6.4 Non-radiative Recombination 271 6.5 Optical Outcoupling 272 6.6 GaAs LEDs 275 6.7 GaAs1−x Px LEDs 277 6.8 Double Heterojunction Alx Ga1−x As LEDs 278 6.9 AlGaInP LEDs 285 6.10 Ga1−xInxN LEDs 286 6.11 LED Structures for Enhanced Outcoupling and High Lumen Output 294 6.12 Summary 299 References 300 Further Reading 301 Problems 303 7 Organic Semiconductors, OLEDs, and Solar Cells 307 7.1 Introduction to Organic Electronics 308 7.2 Conjugated Systems 309 7.3 Polymer OLEDs 314 7.4 Small-Molecule OLEDs 320 7.5 Anode Materials 323 7.6 Cathode Materials 324 7.7 Hole Injection Layer 325 7.8 Electron Injection Layer 326 7.9 Hole Transport Layer 326 7.10 Electron Transport Layer 328 7.11 Light-Emitting Material Processes 330 7.12 Host Materials 332 7.13 Fluorescent Dopants 334 7.14 Phosphorescent and Thermally Activated Delayed Fluorescence Dopants 335 7.15 Organic Solar Cells 340 7.16 Organic Solar Cell Materials 344 7.17 Summary 349 References 352 Further Reading 352 Problems 353 8 Junction Transistors 359 8.1 Introduction 359 8.2 Bipolar Junction Transistor 360 8.3 Junction Field-Effect Transistor 367 8.4 BJT and JFET Symbols and Applications 371 8.5 Summary 372 Further Reading 373 Problems 375 Appendix 1: Physical Constants 377 Appendix 2: Derivation of the Uncertainty Principle 379 Appendix 3: Derivation of Group Velocity 383 Appendix 4: The Boltzmann Distribution Function 385 Appendix 5: Properties of Semiconductor Materials 391 Index 392

    15 in stock

    £66.56

  • Principles of Electric Machines and Power

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Principles of Electric Machines and Power

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisPrinciples of Electrical Machines provides a comprehensive discourse on the characteristics and working principles of various types of electrical machines. Starting with magnetic circuits which form an integral part of electrical machines, the book goes on to cover transformers and the general principles of energy conversion. The book then extensively discusses different types of electrical machinesdc machines, three-phase induction machines, and three-phase synchronous machines; single-phase motors, which are widely used in household and office appliances; and special motors such as servomotors, linear synchronous motors, brushless DC motors, switched reluctance motors, synchro motors, and stepper motors. Using a gradational approach, the first few sections in each chapter are devoted to the basic principles of operation, and later sections are devoted mostly to a more detailed study of the particular machine. In addition to strengthening the organization of the contents, this International adaptation provides new and updated materials, and is well supported by a plethora of new examples, illustrations, end-of-chapter problems, and multiple choice questions.Table of ContentsCHAPTER 1: MAGNETIC CIRCUITS 1.1 MAGNETIC CIRCUITS 1.2 HYSTERESIS 1.3 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN FLUX, EMF AND FORCE 1.4 SINUSOIDAL EXCITATION 1.5 PERMANENT MAGNET CHAPTER 2: TRANSFORMERS 2.1 IDEAL TRANSFORMER 2.2 PRACTICAL TRANSFORMER 2.3 VOLTAGE REGULATION 2.4 EFFICIENCY 2.5 TESTS ON TRANSFORMERS 2.6 AUTOTRANSFORMER 2.7 THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMERS 2.8 HARMONICS IN THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMER BANKS 2.9 THREE WINDING TRANSFORMERS 2.10 PARALLEL OPERATION AND LOAD SHARING OF SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE TRANSFORMERS 2.11 TAP CHANGING TRANSFORMERS 2.12 PER-UNIT (PU) SYSTEM 2.13 HEATING AND COOLING OF TRANSFORMERS 2.14 APPLICATIONS OF TRANSFORMERS CHAPTER 3: ELECTROMECHANICAL ENERGY CONVERSION 3.1 ENERGY CONVERSION PROCESS 3.2 FIELD ENERGY 3.3 MECHANICAL FORCE IN THE ELECTROMAGNETIC SYSTEM 3.4 ROTATING MACHINES 3.5 CYLINDRICAL MACHINES CHAPTER 4: MACHINE WINDINGS, MMF DISTRIBUTION, AND MAGNETIC FIELDS 4.1 WINDING ARRANGEMENT 4.2 PULSATING AND ROTATING MAGNETIC FIELDS 4.3 SPACE HARMONICS 4.4 TIME HARMONICS CHAPTER 5: DC MACHINES 5.1 ELECTROMAGNETIC CONVERSION 5.2 DC MACHINES 5.3 DC GENERATORS 5.4 DC MOTORS 5.5 SPEED CONTROL 5.6 PERMANENT MAGNET DC (PMDC) MOTORS 5.7 BRAKING OF DC MOTORS 5.8 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (PCB) MOTORS CHAPTER 6: INDUCTION (ASYNCHRONOUS) MACHINES 6.1 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES 6.2 INDUCED VOLTAGES 6.3 POLYPHASE INDUCTION MACHINE 6.4 THREE MODES OF OPERATION 6.5 INVERTED INDUCTION MACHINE 6.6 EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT MODEL 6.7 NO-LOAD TEST, BLOCKED-ROTOR TEST, AND EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT PARAMETERS 6.8 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS [Separation of Iron Loss and Friction and Windage Loss of the Induction Motor] 6.9 POWER FLOW IN THREE MODES OF OPERATION 6.10 CIRCLE DIAGRAM FOR THE INDUCTION MACHINE 6.11 EFFECTS OF ROTOR RESISTANCE 6.12 CLASSES OF SQUIRREL-CAGE MOTORS 6.13 SPEED CONTROL 6.14 STARTING OF INDUCTION MOTORS 6.15 TIME AND SPACE HARMONICS 6.16 LINEAR INDUCTION MOTOR (LIM) CHAPTER 7: SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 7.1 CONSTRUCTION OF THREE-PHASE SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 7.2 SYNCHRONOUS GENERATORS 7.3 SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS 7.4 EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT MODEL 7.5 POWER AND TORQUE CHARACTERISTICS 7.6 CAPABILITY CURVES 7.7 POWER FACTOR CONTROL 7.8 INDEPENDENT GENERATORS 7.9 PARALLEL OPERATION AND LOAD SHARING OF GENERATORS 7.10 SALIENT POLE SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 7.11 SPEED CONTROL OF SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS 7.12 APPLICATIONS CHAPTER 8: SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS 8.1 SINLE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS 8.2 STARTING WINDING DESIGN 8.3 EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT OF A CAPACITOR-RUN MOTOR 8.4 SINGLE-PHASE SERIES (UNIVERSAL) MOTORS 8.5 SINGLE-PHASE SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS 8.6 SPEED CONTROL CHAPTER 9: SPECIAL MACHINES 9.1 SERVOMOTORS 9.2 LINEAR SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR (LSM) 9.3 BRUSHLESS DC (BLDC) MOTORS 9.4 SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTORS (SRM) 9.5 SYNCHROS 9.6 STEPPER MOTORS APPENDIX A: BALANCED THREE-PHASE CIRCUITS APPENDIX B: UNITS AND CONSTANTS APPENDIX C: LAPLACE TRANSFORMS APPENDIX D: ANSWERS TO SELECTED PROBLEMS INDEX

    15 in stock

    £51.29

  • Practical Creativity and Innovation in Systems

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Practical Creativity and Innovation in Systems

    Out of stock

    Book SynopsisA guide to systems engineering that highlights creativity and innovation in order to foster great ideas and carry them out Practical Creativity and Innovation in Systems Engineering exposes engineers to a broad set of creative methods they can adopt in their daily practices. In addition, this book guides engineers to become entrepreneurs within traditional engineering companies, promoting creative and innovative culture around them. The author describes basic systems engineering concepts and includes an abbreviated summary of Standard 15288 systems' life cycle processes. He then provides an extensive collection of practical creative methods which are linked to the various systems' life cycle processes. Next, the author discusses obstacles to innovation and, in particular, how engineers can push creative ideas through layers of reactionary bureaucracy within non-innovative organizations. Finally, the author provides a comprehensive description of an exemplary creative and innovative Table of ContentsContents Preface xiii Acknowledgments xv Part I Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction to Part I 1 1.2 Systems Engineering 4 1.3 Creative Methods 5 1.4 Promoting Innovative Culture 6 1.5 Creative and Innovative Case Study 8 1.6 Back Matter 9 1.7 Bibliography 10 Part II Systems Engineering 11 2.1 Introduction to Part II 11 2.2 Basic Systems Engineering Concepts 13 2.2.1 Essence of Systems Engineering 13 2.2.2 Organizations and Projects Concepts 13 2.2.3 System Concepts 14 2.2.4 Life Cycle Concepts 16 2.2.5 Process Concepts 18 2.2.6 Further Reading 19 2.3 Standard 15288 Processes 19 2.3.1 Agreement Process Group 20 2.3.2 Organizational Project‐Enabling Process Group 21 2.3.3 Technical Management Process Group 25 2.3.4 Technical Process Group 31 2.3.5 Further Reading 44 2.4 Philosophy of Engineering 44 2.4.1 Engineering and Truth 45 2.4.2 The Logic of Engineering Design 46 2.4.3 The Context and Nature of Engineering Design 48 2.4.4 Roles and Rules and the Modeling of Socio‐Technical Systems 51 2.4.5 Engineering as Synthesis – Doing Right Things and Doing Things Right 54 2.4.6 Further Reading 57 2.5 Bibliography 57 Part III Creative Methods 59 3.1 Introduction to Part III 59 3.2 Divergent Methods for Individuals 61 3.2.1 Lateral Thinking 61 3.2.2 Resolving Contradictions 68 3.2.3 Biomimicry Engineering 76 3.2.4 Visual Creativity (Three Methods) 80 3.3 Divergent Methods for Teams 88 3.3.1 Classic Brainstorming 88 3.3.2 Six Thinking Hats 91 3.3.3 SWOT Analysis 94 3.3.4 SCAMPER Analysis 100 3.3.5 Focus Groups 103 3.4 Convergent Methods for Individuals 105 3.4.1 PMI Analysis 105 3.4.2 Morphological Analysis 110 3.4.3 Decision Tree Analysis 112 3.4.4 Value Analysis/Value Engineering 116 3.4.5 Pareto Analysis 122 3.5 Convergent Methods for Teams 124 3.5.1 Delphi Method 124 3.5.2 SAST Analysis 129 3.5.3 Cause‐and‐Effect Diagram 134 3.5.4 Kano Model Analysis 137 3.5.5 Group Decisions: Theoretical Background 142 3.5.6 Group Decisions: Practical Methods 150 3.6 Other Creative Methods 156 3.6.1 Process Map Analysis 157 3.6.2 Nine‐Screens Analysis 160 3.6.3 Technology Forecasting 165 3.6.4 Design Structure Matrix Analysis 172 3.6.5 Failure Mode Effect Analysis 175 3.6.6 Anticipatory Failure Determination 184 3.6.7 Conflict Analysis and Resolution 191 3.7 Bibliography 198 Part IV Promoting Innovative Culture 205 4.1 Introduction to Part IV 205 4.2 Systems Evolution 207 4.2.1 Modeling Systems Evolution – S‐Curve 207 4.2.2 Laws of Systems Evolution 209 4.2.3 Further Reading 226 4.3 Modeling the Innovation Process 226 4.3.1 Classes and Types of Innovations 226 4.3.2 Technological Innovation Process 228 4.3.3 Innovation Funding 235 4.3.4 Further Reading 239 4.4 Measuring Creativity and Innovation 239 4.4.1 Defining Innovation Objectives 239 4.4.2 Measuring the Innovation Process 241 4.4.3 Innovation Capability Maturity Model 246 4.4.4 Further Reading 250 4.5 Obstacles to Innovation 250 4.5.1 Human Habits Factors 250 4.5.2 Costs Factors 252 4.5.3 Institutional Factors 252 4.5.4 Knowledge Factors 253 4.5.5 Markets Factors 253 4.5.6 Innovation Obstacles and Classes of Innovations 254 4.5.7 Further Reading 255 4.6 Promoting Organization’s Innovative Culture 255 4.6.1 Introduction 255 4.6.2 Innovation and Leadership 256 4.6.3 Innovation and Organization 259 4.6.4 Innovation and People 260 4.6.5 Innovation and Assets 262 4.6.6 Innovation and Culture 264 4.6.7 Innovation and Values 267 4.6.8 Innovation and Processes 268 4.6.9 Innovation and Tools 268 4.6.10 Conclusion: Ascent to Innovation: Practical Steps 271 4.6.11 Further Reading 274 4.7 Pushing Creative Ideas by Individual Engineers 275 4.7.1 Large Organizations Seldom Innovate 275 4.7.2 Characteristics of Innovative Engineers 280 4.7.3 Innovation Advice to Creative Engineers 285 4.7.4 Further Reading 290 4.8 Human Diversity and Gendered Innovation 290 4.8.1 Human Diversity 290 4.8.2 Shift in Gender Paradigm 292 4.8.3 Gender Disparity and Innovation Implications 295 4.8.4 Advancing Gendered Innovation 298 4.8.5 Gendered Innovation Example 304 4.8.6 Further Reading 308 4.9 Cognitive Biases and Decision‐Making 308 4.9.1 Cognitive Biases 309 4.9.2 Cognitive Biases and Strategic Decisions 315 4.9.3 Further Reading 318 4.10 Bibliography 319 Part V Creative and Innovative Case Study 327 5.1 Introduction to Part V 327 5.2 A Problem Seeking a Solution 329 5.2.1 The Problem and Its Inception 329 5.2.2 Initial Funding Effort 331 5.2.3 Further Reading 331 5.3 Gaining Deeper Insights 331 5.3.1 The Problem and the Approach 332 5.3.2 Main Ideas of the Proposed Work 334 5.3.3 Measurable Project Objectives 336 5.3.4 Basis for Predicting the Objectives 337 5.3.5 Systems Adaptability: State‐of‐the‐Art 340 5.3.6 Further Reading 345 5.4 Project Planning 346 5.4.1 Project Planned Activities 346 5.4.2 Detailed Work Package Descriptions 359 5.4.3 Risks and Contingency Plans 372 5.4.4 Management Structure and Procedures 375 5.4.5 Project Participants 382 5.4.6 Resources Needed 387 5.5 The AMISA Project 388 5.5.1 AMISA Initiation 388 5.5.2 Identifying the DFA State‐of‐the‐Art 389 5.5.3 Establishing Requirements for AMISA 390 5.5.4 Implementing a Software Support Tool 390 5.5.5 Developing Six Pilot Projects 391 5.5.6 Generating Deliverables 397 5.5.7 Planning Exploitation beyond AMISA 399 5.5.8 Disseminating Project Results 399 5.5.9 Assessing the AMISA Project 400 5.5.10 Consortium Meetings 402 5.5.11 EC Summary of the Project 405 5.5.12 Further Reading 408 5.6 Architecture Options Theory 408 5.6.1 Financial and Engineering Options 408 5.6.2 Transaction Costs and Interface Costs 410 5.6.3 Architecture Adaptability Value 412 5.6.4 Design Structure Matrix 413 5.6.5 Dynamic System Value Modeling 414 5.6.6 Further Reading 417 5.7 Architecture Options Example 417 5.7.1 Step 1: Define the System and Its Environment 418 5.7.2 Step 2: Decompose the System Architecture 419 5.7.3 Step 3: Determine a Time Horizon for System Upgrade 419 5.7.4 Step 4: Determine Option Value (OV) of Each Component 422 5.7.5 Step 5: Determine Interface Cost (IC) of Each Interface 426 5.7.6 Step 6: Model the System by Way of Design Structure Matrix (DSM) 427 5.7.7 Step 7: Compute Base System’s AAV 428 5.7.8 Step 8: Define Components’ Exclusion Sets 428 5.7.9 Step 9: Optimize the System Architecture (Merging) 431 5.7.10 Step 10: Perform Sensitivity Analyses 434 5.7.11 Step 11: Evaluate Alternative System Architectures 438 5.7.12 Step 12: Define System Variants 439 5.7.13 Step 13: Estimate the Optimal Upgrade Time 441 5.7.14 Further Reading 442 5.8 AMISA – Endnote 442 5.9 Bibliography 444 Appendix A Life Cycle Processes versus Recommended Creative Methods 447 Appendix B Extended Laws of Technical Systems Evolution 451 B.1 Law 1: System Convergence 452 B.2 Laws 2 to 7: Systems Merging 452 B.3 Law 8: Flow Conductivity 456 B.4 Laws 9 to 14: Enhanced Coordination 458 B.5 Law 15: Controllability 462 B.6 Law 16: Dynamization 463 B.7 Law 17: Transition to Super System 463 B.8 Law 18: Increasing System Completeness 465 B.9 Law 19: Displacement of Human 466 B.10 Law 20: Uneven System Evolution 466 B.11 Law 21: Technology General Progress 467 Appendix C List of Acronyms 469 Appendix D Permissions to Use Third‐Party Copyright Material 475 D.1 Part I: Introduction 475 D.2 Part II: Systems Engineering 475 D.3 Part III: Creative Methods 476 D.4 Part IV: Promoting Innovative Culture 477 D.5 Part V: Creative and Innovative Case Study 479 D.6 Appendices 480 Index 483 Wiley Series in Systems Engineering and Management 491

    Out of stock

    £101.66

  • A Guide to Feedback Theory

    Cambridge University Press A Guide to Feedback Theory

    Out of stock

    Book SynopsisDo you need to understand feedback? Perhaps you''re a little rusty on theory basics? Dig in to this self-contained guide for an accessible and concise explanation of the fundamentals. Distills the relevant essence of linear system theory, calculus, differential equations, linear algebra, basic physics, numerical methods, and complex analysis, and links them back to an explanation of feedback theory. Provides a tight synthesis of analytical and conceptual understanding. Maintains a focus on common use cases. Whether you are a struggling undergraduate, a doctoral student preparing for your qualifying exams, or an industry practitioner, this easy-to-understand book invites you to relax, enjoy the material, and follow your curiosity.Trade Review'Feedback theory is an intrinsically mathematical discipline in which one can feel either submerged by formulae or driven to use blind computer simulations that hide insight. Dawson's approach is to extract visceral meaning out of this tangle, arguing that a deep understanding of dynamic stability criteria can free the designer from 'equational overload' and lead to incisive selection of the right mathematical tool for the job at hand.' Stephen D. Senturia, Massachusetts Institute of Technology'Feedback is perhaps the most foundational concept for electronics and control systems in general, but it is often covered for specific circuits for the former, and in terms of theoretical concepts for the latter. This book provides us with a unique perspective of how feedback theory in general relates to practical systems and electronics applications.' Larry Pileggi, Carnegie Mellon University'Recommended.' D. Z. Spicer, Choice MagazineTable of ContentsPreface; 1. Linear Systems: What You Missed the First Time; 2. The Basics of Feedback; 3. The Nyquist Stability Criterion; 4. Some Common Loose Ends; 5. Feedback in the Real World; 6. Conclusion and Further Reading; Notes; Index.

    Out of stock

    £20.89

  • Principles of Electronic Communication Systems

    McGraw-Hill Education Principles of Electronic Communication Systems

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisPrinciples of Electronic Communication Systems provides the most up-to-date survey available for students taking a first course in electronic communications. Requiring only basic algebra and trigonometry, this new edition is notable for its readability, learning features and numerous full-color photos and illustrations. A systems approach is used to cover state-of-the-art communications technologies, to best reflect current industry practice.This title is available in Connect with SmartBook, featuring end-of-chapter homework problems and auto-graded questions from the manual. Instructor Resources for this title include an Instructor''s Manual and Lab and Experiments Manual Answers.Table of Contents1 Introduction to Electronic Communication2 Electronic Fundamentals for Communications3 Amplitude Modulation Fundamentals4 Amplitude Modulator and Demodulator Circuits5 Fundamentals of Frequency Modulation6 FM Circuits7 Digital Communication Techniques8 Radio Transmitters9 Communication Receivers10 Digital Data Transmission11 Multiplexing, Duplexing, and Multiple Access12 Digital and Software-Defined Radios13 Transmission Lines14 Fundamentals of Networking, Local Area Networks, and Ethernet15 Wired Data Communications16 Antennas and Wave Propagation17 Internet Technologies18 Microwave and Millimeter-Wave Communication19 Satellite Communication20 Optical Communication21 Cell Phone Technologies22 Wireless Technologies23 Communication Tests and Measurements

    15 in stock

    £46.79

  • The 4Ds of Energy Transition: Decarbonization,

    Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH The 4Ds of Energy Transition: Decarbonization,

    1 in stock

    Book SynopsisThe 4Ds of Energy Transition Enables readers to understand technology-driven approaches that address the challenges of today’s energy scenario and the shift towards sustainable energy transition This book provides a comprehensive account of the characteristics of energy transition, covering the latest advancements, trends, and practices around the topic. It charts the path to global energy sustainability based on existing technology by focusing on the four dynamic approaches of decarbonization, decreasing use, decentralization, and digitalization, plus the important technical, economic, social and policy perspectives surrounding those approaches. Each technology is demonstrated with an introduction and a set of specific chapters. The work appropriately incorporates up-to-date data, case studies, and comparative assessments to further aid in reader comprehension. Sample topics discussed within the work by key thinkers and researchers in the broader fields of energy include: Renewable energy and sustainable energy future Decarbonization in energy sector Hydrogen and fuel cells Electric mobility and sustainable transportation Energy conservation and management Distributed and off-grid generation, energy storage, and batteries Digitalization in energy sector; smart meters, smart grids, blockchain This book is an ideal professional resource for engineers, academics, and policy makers working in areas related to the development of energy solutions.Table of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgement xvi Foreword xvii 1 Introduction to the Four-Dimensional Energy Transition 1 Muhammad Asif 1.1 Energy: Resources and Conversions 1 1.2 Climate Change in Focus 3 1.3 The Unfolding Energy Transition 4 1.4 The Four Dimensions of the Twenty-First Century Energy Transition 6 1.4.1 Decarbonization 7 1.4.2 Decentralization 7 1.4.3 Digitalization 8 1.4.4 Decreasing Energy Use 8 1.5 Conclusions 8 References 9 Part I Decarbonization 11 2 Global Energy Transition and Experiences from China and Germany 13 Heiko Thomas and Bing Xue 2.1 Global Energy Transition 13 2.2 China 17 2.2.1 How to Achieve Carbon Neutrality Before 2060 and Keep the World’s Largest Economy Running 17 2.2.2 China as the World’s Leader in Renewable Installations 19 2.2.3 Particular Measures to Reduce GHG Emissions 20 2.3 Germany 23 2.3.1 Climate Action and GHG Emission Reduction Targets 23 2.3.2 System Requirements to Achieve the GHG Emission Reduction Goals 24 2.3.3 Potential for GHG Emission Reduction in the Building Sector 27 2.3.4 Underachieving in the Transport Sector 27 2.3.5 A New Emission Trading Scheme Specifically Tackles the Heating and Transport Sectors 29 2.4 Comparing Energy Transitions in China and Germany 30 2.4.1 Different Strategies and Boundary Conditions 30 2.4.2 Comparing the Mobility Sector 32 2.4.3 Policy Instruments and Implementation 33 2.5 Summary and Final Remarks 37 References 38 3 Decarbonization in the Energy Sector 41 Muhammad Asif 3.1 Decarbonization 41 3.2 Decarbonization Pathways 42 3.2.1 Renewable Energy 43 3.2.1.1 Solar Energy 43 3.2.1.2 Wind Power 44 3.2.1.3 Hydropower 44 3.2.2 Electric Mobility 44 3.2.3 Hydrogen and Fuel Cells 45 3.2.4 Energy Storage 46 3.2.5 Energy Efficiency 46 3.2.6 Decarbonization of Fossil Fuel Sector 46 3.3 Decarbonization: Developments and Trends 47 References 48 4 Renewable Technologies: Applications and Trends 51 Muhammad Asif 4.1 Introduction 51 4.2 Overview of Renewable Technologies 52 4.2.1 Solar Energy 52 4.2.1.1 Solar PV 52 4.2.1.2 Solar Thermal Energy 54 4.2.2 Wind Power 57 4.2.3 Hydropower 58 4.2.3.1 Dam/Storage 59 4.2.3.2 Run-of-the-River 59 4.2.3.3 Pumped Storage 59 4.2.4 Biomass 60 4.2.5 Geothermal Energy 61 4.2.6 Wave and Tidal Power 62 4.3 Renewables Advancements and Trends 63 4.3.1 Market Growth 63 4.3.2 Economics 65 4.3.3 Technological Advancements 65 4.3.4 Power Density 67 4.3.5 Energy Storage 67 4.4 Conclusions 69 References 69 5 Fundamentals and Applications of Hydrogen and Fuel Cells 73 Bengt Sundén 5.1 Introduction 73 5.2 Hydrogen – General 74 5.2.1 Production of Hydrogen 74 5.2.2 Storage of Hydrogen 75 5.2.3 Transportation of Hydrogen 76 5.2.4 Concerns About Hydrogen 76 5.2.5 Advantages of Hydrogen Energy 76 5.2.6 Disadvantages of Hydrogen Energy 76 5.3 Basic Electrochemistry and Thermodynamics 77 5.4 Fuel Cells – Overview 78 5.4.1 Types of Fuel Cells 79 5.4.2 Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells (PEMFC) or Polymer Electrolyte Fuel Cells (PEFC) 83 5.4.2.1 Performance of a PEMFC 83 5.4.3 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells (SOFC) 83 5.4.4 Comparison of PEMFCs and SOFCs 84 5.4.5 Overall Description of Basic Transport Processes and Operations of a Fuel Cell 85 5.4.5.1 Electrochemical Kinetics 85 5.4.5.2 Heat and Mass Transfer 85 5.4.5.3 Charge and Water Transport 86 5.4.5.4 Heat Generation 87 5.4.6 Modeling Approaches for Fuel Cells 87 5.4.6.1 Softwares 89 5.4.7 Fuel Cell Systems and Applications 90 5.4.7.1 Portable Power 90 5.4.7.2 Backup Power 91 5.4.7.3 Transportation 91 5.4.7.4 Stationary Power 92 5.4.7.5 Maritime Applications 93 5.4.7.6 Aerospace Applications 94 5.4.7.7 Aircraft Applications 95 5.4.8 Bottlenecks for Fuel Cells 95 5.5 Conclusions 97 Acknowledgments 97 Nomenclature 97 Abbreviations 98 References 99 6 Decarbonizing with Nuclear Power, Current Builds, and Future Trends 103 Hasliza Omar, Geordie Graetz, and Mark Ho 6.1 Introduction 103 6.2 The Historic Cost of Nuclear Power 104 6.3 The Small Modular Reactor (SMR): Could Smaller Be Better? 109 6.3.1 New Nuclear Reactor in Town 109 6.3.2 Is It the Smaller the Better? 110 6.4 Evaluating the Economic Competitiveness of SMRs 113 6.4.1 Size Matters 113 6.4.2 Construction Time 113 6.4.3 Co-siting Economies 114 6.4.4 Learning Rates 115 6.4.5 The Levelized Cost of Electricity (LCOE): Is It a Reliable Measure? 118 6.4.6 The Overnight Capital Cost (OCC): SMRs vs. a Large Reactor 120 6.5 Nuclear Energy: Looking Beyond Its Perceived Reputation 123 6.5.1 Load-Following and Cogeneration 123 6.5.2 Industrial Heat (District and Process) 125 6.5.3 Hydrogen Production 127 6.5.4 Seawater Desalination 130 6.6 Western Nuclear Industry Trends 131 6.6.1 The United States 131 6.6.2 The United Kingdom 132 6.6.3 Canada 135 6.7 Conclusions 137 References 141 7 Decarbonization of the Fossil Fuel Sector 153 Tian Goh and Beng Wah Ang 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 Technologies for the Decarbonization of the Fossil Fuel Sector 154 7.2.1 Historical Developments 154 7.2.2 Hydrogen Economy 155 7.2.3 Carbon Capture and Storage 156 7.3 Recent Advancements and Potential 157 7.3.1 Carbon Capture and Storage 158 7.3.2 Carbon Capture and Utilization 158 7.4 Future Emission Scenarios and Challenges to Decarbonization 160 7.4.1 Application in Future Emission Scenarios 160 7.4.2 Challenges to Decarbonization 164 7.5 Controversies and Debates 167 7.5.1 Opposing Narratives 167 7.5.2 Public Perceptions 169 7.6 Conclusions 171 References 172 8 Electric Vehicle Adoption Dynamics on the Road to Deep Decarbonization 177 Emil Dimanchev, Davood Qorbani, and Magnus Korpås 8.1 Introduction 177 8.2 Current State of Electric Vehicles 178 8.2.1 Electric Vehicle Technology 178 8.2.2 Electric Vehicle Environmental Attributes 179 8.2.3 Competing Low-Carbon Vehicle Technologies 180 8.3 Contribution of Road Transport to Decarbonization Policy 181 8.3.1 State and Trends of CO2 Emissions from Transportation and Passenger Vehicles 181 8.3.2 Decarbonization of Transport 182 8.3.3 Decarbonization Pathways for Passenger Vehicles and the Role of Electric Vehicles 183 8.4 Dynamics of Vehicle Fleet Turnover 190 8.4.1 Illustrative Fleet Turnover Model 190 8.4.2 Implications of Fleet Turnover Dynamics for Meeting Decarbonization Targets 191 8.5 Electric Vehicle Policy 194 8.5.1 Case Study of Electric Vehicle Policy in Norway 195 8.6 Prospects for Electric Vehicle Technology and Economics 196 8.7 Conclusions 199 References 200 9 Integrated Energy System: A Low-Carbon Future Enabler 207 Pengfei Zhao, Chenghong Gu, Zhidong Cao, and Shuangqi Li 9.1 Paradigm Shift in Energy Systems 207 9.2 Key Technologies in Integrated Energy Systems 210 9.2.1 Conversion Technologies 211 9.2.1.1 Combined Heat and Power 211 9.2.1.2 Heat Pump and Gas Furnace 211 9.2.1.3 Power to Gas 211 9.2.1.4 Gas Storage 212 9.2.1.5 Battery Energy Storage Systems 212 9.2.2 Energy Hub Systems 213 9.2.3 Modeling of Integrated Energy Systems 214 9.3 Management of Integrated Energy Systems 215 9.3.1 Optimization Techniques for Integrated Energy Systems 215 9.3.1.1 Stochastic Optimization 215 9.3.1.2 Robust Optimization 215 9.3.1.3 Distributionally Robust Optimization 217 9.3.2 Supply Quality Issues 217 9.3.2.1 Voltage Issues 217 9.3.2.2 Gas Quality Issues 218 9.4 Volt–Pressure Optimization for Integrated Energy Systems 219 9.4.1 Research Gap 219 9.4.2 Problem Formulation 220 9.4.2.1 Day-Ahead Constraints of VPO 220 9.4.2.2 Real-Time Constraints of VPO 222 9.4.2.3 Objective Function of Two-Stage VPO 222 9.4.3 Results and Discussions 223 9.4.3.1 Studies on VVO 223 9.4.3.2 Studies on Economic Performance 227 9.4.3.3 Studies on Gas Quality Management 228 9.5 Conclusions 229 A Appendix: Nomenclature 230 A.1 Indices and Sets 230 A.2 Parameters 230 A.3 Variables and Functions 232 References 233 Part II Decreasing Use 239 10 Decreasing the Use of Energy for Sustainable Energy Transition 241 Muhammad Asif 10.1 Why Decrease the Use of Energy? 241 10.2 Energy Efficiency Approaches 243 10.2.1 Change of Attitude 243 10.2.2 Performance Enhancement 244 10.2.3 New Technologies 244 10.3 Scope of Energy Efficiency 244 References 245 11 Energy Conservation and Management in Buildings 247 Wahhaj Ahmed and Muhammad Asif 11.1 Energy and Environmental Footprint of Buildings 247 11.2 Energy-Efficiency Potential in Buildings 248 11.3 Energy-Efficient Design Strategies 250 11.3.1 Passive and Active Design Strategies 251 11.3.2 Energy Modeling to Design Energy-Efficient Strategies 251 11.4 Building Energy Retrofit 255 11.4.1 Building Energy-Retrofit Classifications 256 11.4.1.1 Pre- and Post-Retrofit Assessment Strategies 256 11.4.1.2 Number and Type of EEMs 257 11.4.1.3 Modeling and Design Approach 258 11.5 Sustainable Building Standards and Certification Systems 260 11.6 Conclusions 261 References 261 12 Methodologies for the Analysis of Energy Consumption in the Industrial Sector 267 Vincenzo Bianco 12.1 Introduction 267 12.2 Overview of Basic Indexes for Energy Consumption Analysis 269 12.2.1 Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) 269 12.2.2 Energy Consumption Elasticity (ECE) 270 12.2.3 Energy Intensity (EI) 270 12.2.4 Linear Correlation Index (LCI) 271 12.2.5 Weather Adjusting Coefficient (WAC) 271 12.3 Decomposition Analysis of Energy Consumption 272 12.4 Case Study: The Italian Industrial Sector 274 12.4.1 Index-Based Analysis 274 12.4.2 Decomposition of Energy Consumption 276 12.5 Relationship Between Energy Efficiency and Energy Transition 283 12.6 Conclusions 284 References 285 Part III Decentralization 287 13 Decentralization in Energy Sector 289 Muhammad Asif 13.1 Introduction 289 13.2 Overview of Decentralized Generation Systems 290 13.2.1 Classification 290 13.2.2 Technologies 292 13.3 Decentralized and Centralized Generation – A Comparison 293 13.3.1 Advantages of Decentralized Generation 293 13.3.1.1 Cost-Effectiveness 293 13.3.1.2 Enhanced Energy Access 293 13.3.1.3 Environment Friendliness 294 13.3.1.4 Security 294 13.3.1.5 Reliability 294 13.3.1.6 Peak Shaving 294 13.3.1.7 Supply Resilience 294 13.3.1.8 New Business Streams 294 13.3.1.9 Other Benefits 295 13.3.2 Disadvantages of Decentralized Generation 295 13.3.2.1 Power Quality 295 13.3.2.2 Effect on Gird Stability 295 13.3.2.3 Energy Storage Requirement 295 13.3.2.4 Institutional Resistance 295 13.4 Developments and Trends 295 References 296 14 Decentralizing the Electricity Infrastructure: What Is Economically Viable? 299 Moritz Vogel, Marion Wingenbach, and Dierk Bauknecht 14.1 Introduction 299 14.2 Decentralization of Electricity Systems 300 14.3 Technological Dimensions of Decentralization 301 14.3.1 Grid Level of Power Plants 302 14.3.2 Regional Distribution of Power Plants 302 14.3.3 Grid Level of Flexibility Options 302 14.3.4 Level of Optimization 303 14.4 Decentralization: Costs and Benefits 303 14.4.1 Grid Level of Power Plants 304 14.4.2 Regional Distribution of Power Plants 305 14.4.3 Grid Level of Flexibility Options 306 14.4.4 Level of Optimization 307 14.5 Germany’s Decentralization Experience: A Case Study 310 14.5.1 System Cost 310 14.5.2 Grid Expansion 314 14.5.3 Key Findings 316 14.6 How Far Should Decentralization Go? 317 14.6.1 Grid Level of Power Plants 317 14.6.2 Regional Distribution of Power Plants 317 14.6.3 Grid Level of Flexibility Options 319 14.6.4 Level of Optimization 319 14.7 Conclusions 320 References 320 15 Governing Decentralized Electricity: Taking a Participatory Turn 325 Marie Claire Brisbois 15.1 Introduction 325 15.2 How Is Decentralization Affecting Traditional Modes of Electricity Governance? 326 15.2.1 Sticking Points for Shifting to Decentralized Governance 327 15.3 What Kinds of Governance Does Decentralization Require? 328 15.3.1 Security 328 15.3.2 Affordability 329 15.3.3 Sustainability 331 15.4 What Do We Know About Decentralized Governance from Other Spheres? 332 15.4.1 Nested, Multilevel Governance of Common Pool Resources 333 15.4.2 Key Components of Common Pool Resource Governance 334 15.4.2.1 Roles and Responsibilities 334 15.4.2.2 Policy Coherence 335 15.4.2.3 Capacity Development 336 15.4.2.4 Transparent and Open Data 336 15.4.2.5 Appropriate Regulations 337 15.4.2.6 Stakeholder Participation 338 15.5 Moving Toward a Decentralized Governance System 339 15.5.1 Phase One 339 15.5.2 Phase Two 340 15.5.3 Phase Three 341 15.6 Conclusions 341 References 342 Part IV Digitalization 347 16 Digitalization in Energy Sector 349 Muhammad Asif 16.1 Introduction 349 16.2 Overview of Digital Technologies 350 16.2.1 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 350 16.2.2 Blockchain 351 16.2.3 Robotics and Automated Technologies 351 16.2.4 Internet of Things 351 16.2.5 Big Data and Data Analytics 352 16.3 Digitalization: Prospects and Challenges 352 References 354 17 Smart Grids and Smart Metering 357 Haroon Farooq, Waqas Ali, and Intisar A. Sajjad 17.1 Introduction 357 17.2 Grid Modernization and Its Need in the Twenty-First Century 358 17.3 Smart Grid 360 17.4 Smart Grid vs. Traditional Grid 362 17.5 Smart Grid Composition and Architecture 362 17.6 Smart Grid Technologies 365 17.7 Smart Metering 367 17.8 Role of Smart Metering in Smart Grid 369 17.9 Key Challenges and the Future of Smart Grid 370 17.10 Implementation Benefits and Positive Impacts 372 17.11 Worldwide Development and Deployment 373 17.12 Conclusions 375 References 376 18 Blockchain in Energy 381 Bernd Teufel and Anton Sentic 18.1 Transformation of the Electricity Market and an Emerging Technology 381 18.2 Blockchain in the Energy Sector 382 18.2.1 Defining Blockchain 383 18.2.2 Utilizing Blockchain in Energy Systems 385 18.2.3 Case Examples for Blockchain Energy 386 18.2.4 Utilization of Blockchain Energy: Introducing an Innovation Perspective 387 18.3 Blockchain as a (Disruptive) Innovation in Energy Transitions 389 18.3.1 Transition Studies, Regimes, and Niche Innovations 389 18.3.2 Blockchain Technologies Between Niche Innovation and the Socio-Technical System 390 18.4 Conclusions and Venues for Further Inquiry 392 Acknowledgment 394 References 394 Epilogue 399 Fereidoon Sioshansi Index 405

    1 in stock

    £85.00

  • Design of Unmanned Aerial Systems

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Design of Unmanned Aerial Systems

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisProvides a comprehensive introduction to the design and analysis of unmanned aircraft systems with a systems perspective Written for students and engineers who are new to the field of unmanned aerial vehicle design, this book teaches the many UAV design techniques being used today and demonstrates how to apply aeronautical science concepts to their design. Design of Unmanned Aerial Systems covers the design of UAVs in three sectionsvehicle design, autopilot design, and ground systems designin a way that allows readers to fully comprehend the science behind the subject so that they can then demonstrate creativity in the application of these concepts on their own. It teaches students and engineers all about: UAV classifications, design groups, design requirements, mission planning, conceptual design, detail design, and design procedures. It provides them with in-depth knowledge of ground stations, power systems, propulsion systems, automatic flight control systems, guidance systems, naviTable of ContentsPreface xix Acronyms xxv Nomenclature xxix About the Companion Website xxxvii 1 Design Fundamentals 1 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 UAV Classifications 5 1.3 Review of a Few Successful UAVs 8 1.4 Design Project Planning 12 1.5 Decision Making 13 1.6 Design Criteria, Objectives, and Priorities 15 1.7 Feasibility Analysis 17 1.8 Design Groups 17 1.9 Design Process 18 1.10 Systems Engineering Approach 19 1.11 UAV Conceptual Design 21 1.12 UAV Preliminary Design 27 1.13 UAV Detail Design 28 1.14 Design Review, Evaluation, Feedback 30 1.15 UAV Design Steps 30 Questions 32 2 Preliminary Design 35 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 Maximum Takeoff Weight Estimation 36 2.3 Weight Buildup 36 2.4 Payload Weight 37 2.5 Autopilot Weight 37 2.6 Fuel Weight 39 2.7 Battery Weight 43 2.8 Empty Weight 47 2.9 Wing and Engine Sizing 48 2.10 Quadcopter Configuration 52 Questions 60 Problems 61 3 Design Disciplines 65 3.1 Introduction 66 3.2 Aerodynamic Design 67 3.3 Structural Design 69 3.4 Propulsion System Design 71 3.5 Landing Gear Design 75 3.6 Mechanical and Power Transmission Systems Design 78 3.7 Electric Systems 80 3.8 Control Surfaces Design 85 3.9 Safety Analysis 90 3.10 Installation Guidelines 95 Questions 96 Design Questions 97 Problems 99 4 Aerodynamic Design 101 4.1 Introduction 102 4.2 Fundamentals of Aerodynamics 103 4.3 Wing Design 104 4.4 Tail Design 113 4.5 Vertical Tail Design 119 4.6 Fuselage Design 123 4.7 Antenna 130 4.8 Aerodynamic Design of Quadcopters 132 4.9 Aerodynamic Design Guidelines 133 Questions 134 Problems 136 5 Fundamentals of Autopilot Design 141 5.1 Introduction 142 5.2 Dynamic Modeling 146 5.3 Aerodynamic Forces and Moments 153 5.4 Simplification Techniques of Dynamic Models 157 5.5 Fixed‐Wing UAV Dynamic Models 161 5.6 Dynamic Model Approximation 169 5.7 Quadcopter (Rotary‐Wing) Dynamic Model 170 5.8 Autopilot Categories 176 5.9 Flight Simulation – Numerical Methods 181 5.10 Flying Qualities for UAVs 185 5.11 Autopilot Design Process 187 Questions 188 Problems 190 6 Control System Design 195 6.1 Introduction 196 6.2 Fundamentals of Control Systems 197 6.3 Servo/Actuator 203 6.4 Flight Control Requirements 207 6.5 Control Modes 209 6.6 Controller Design 223 6.7 Autonomy 234 6.8 Manned–Unmanned Aircraft Teaming 237 6.9 Control System Design Process 243 Questions 246 Problems 249 7 Guidance System Design 255 7.1 Introduction 256 7.2 Fundamentals 257 7.3 Guidance Laws 263 7.4 Command Guidance Law 265 7.5 PN Guidance Law 269 7.6 Pursuit Guidance Law 273 7.7 Waypoint Guidance Law 274 7.8 Sense and Avoid 282 7.9 Formation Flight 291 7.10 Motion Planning and Trajectory Design 293 7.11 Guidance Sensor – Seeker 294 7.12 Guidance System Design 296 Questions 298 Problems 300 8 Navigation System Design 305 8.1 Introduction 306 8.2 Classifications 307 8.3 Coordinate Systems 309 8.4 Inertial Navigation System 311 8.5 Kalman Filtering 315 8.6 Global Positioning System 317 8.7 Position Fixing Navigation 322 8.8 Navigation in Reduced Visibility Conditions 323 8.9 Inertial Navigation Sensors 323 8.10 Navigation Disturbances 335 8.11 Navigation System Design 345 Questions 348 Problems 351 9 Microcontroller 355 9.1 Introduction 356 9.2 Basic Fundamentals 358 9.3 Microcontroller Circuitry 367 9.4 Embedded Systems 369 9.5 Microcontroller Programming 371 9.6 Programming in C 374 9.7 Arduino 378 9.8 Open‐Source Commercial Autopilots 384 9.9 Design Procedure 387 9.10 Design Project 388 Questions 393 Problems 395 Design Projects 397 10 Launch and Recovery Systems Design 399 10.1 Introduction 400 10.2 Launch Technologies and Techniques 402 10.3 Launcher Equipment 410 10.4 Fundamentals of Launch 415 10.5 Elevation Mechanism Design 422 10.6 VTOL 424 10.7 Recovery Technologies and Techniques 424 10.8 Recovery Fundamentals 429 10.9 Launch/Recovery Systems Mobility 431 10.10 Launch and Recovery Systems Design 433 Questions 437 Problems 440 Design Projects 443 11 Ground Control Station 445 11.1 Introduction 446 11.2 GCS Subsystems 448 11.3 Types of Ground Stations 448 11.4 GCS of a Number of UAVs 460 11.5 Human‐Related Design Requirements 464 11.6 Support Equipment 469 11.7 GCS Design Guidelines 472 Questions 473 Problems 475 Design Problems 476 Laboratory Experiments 477 12 Payloads Selection/Design 481 12.1 Introduction 482 12.2 Elements of Payload 483 12.3 Payloads of a Few UAVs 484 12.4 Cargo or Freight Payload 487 12.5 Reconnaissance/Surveillance Payload 488 12.6 Scientific Payloads 505 12.7 Military Payloads 508 12.8 Electronic Counter Measure Payloads 509 12.9 Payload Installation 511 12.10 Payload Control and Management 520 12.11 Payload Selection/Design Guidelines 520 Questions 523 Problems 525 Design Problems 527 13 Communications System Design 531 13.1 Fundamentals 532 13.2 Data Link 534 13.3 Transmitter 536 13.4 Receiver 537 13.5 Antenna 539 13.6 Radio Frequency 541 13.7 Encryption 544 13.8 Communications Systems of a Few UAVs 545 13.9 Installation 547 13.10 Communications System Design 547 13.11 Bi‐directional Communications Using Arduino Boards 548 Questions 558 Problems 560 Laboratory Experiments 561 Design Projects 562 14 Design Analysis and Feedbacks 565 14.1 Introduction 566 14.2 Design Feedbacks 567 14.3 Weight and Balance 569 14.4 Stability Analysis 573 14.5 Controllability Analysis 579 14.6 Flight Performance Analysis 582 14.7 Cost Analysis 591 Questions 593 Problems 595 References 601 Index 609

    15 in stock

    £106.16

  • Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisThe Updated Third Edition Provides a Systems Approach to Sustainable Green Energy Production and Contains Analytical Tools for the Design of Renewable Microgrids The revised third edition ofDesign of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systemsintegrates three areas of electrical engineering: power systems, power electronics, and electric energy conversion systems. The book also addresses the fundamental design of wind and photovoltaic (PV) energy microgrids as part of smart-bulk power-grid systems. In order to demystify the complexity of the integrated approach, the author first presents the basic concepts, and then explores a simulation test bed in MATLAB in order to use these concepts to solve a basic problem in the development of smart grid energy system. Each chapter offers a problem of integration and describes why it is important. Then the mathematical model of the problem is formulated, and the solution steps are outlined. This step is followed by deTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xvi About the Companion Website xvii 1 Energy and Civilization 1 1.1 Introduction: Motivation 1 1.2 Fossil Fuel 2 1.3 Energy Use and Industrialization 2 1.4 Nuclear Energy 4 1.5 Global Warming 5 1.6 The Age of the Electric Power Grid 9 1.7 Green and Renewable Energy Sources 10 1.8 Hydrogen 11 1.9 Solar and Photovoltaic 11 1.9.1 Wind Power 12 1.9.2 Geothermal 13 1.10 Biomass 13 1.11 Ethanol 13 1.12 Energy Units and Conversions 13 1.13 Estimating the Cost of Energy 17 1.14 New Oil Boom–Hydraulic Fracturing (Fracking) 20 1.15 Estimation of Future CO2 21 1.16 The Paris Agreement | UNFCCC 22 1.17 Energy Utilization and Economic Growth 23 1.18 Conclusion 23 Problems 24 Further Reading 26 2 Power Grids 28 2.1 Introduction 28 2.2 Electric Power Grids 29 2.2.1 Background 29 2.2.2 The Construction of a Power Grid System 29 2.3 Basic Concepts of Power Grids 33 2.3.1 Common Terms 33 2.3.2 Calculating Power Consumption 33 2.4 Load Models 49 2.5 Transformers in Electric Power Grids 53 2.5.1 A Short History of Transformers 54 2.5.2 Transmission Voltage 54 2.5.3 Transformers 55 2.6 Modeling a Microgrid System 59 2.6.1 The Per Unit System 60 2.7 Modeling Three-Phase Transformers 69 2.8 Tap-Changing Transformers 72 2.9 Modeling Transmission Lines 74 Problems 87 References 92 3 Modeling of Converters in Power Grid Distributed Generation Systems 93 3.1 Introduction 93 3.2 Single-Phase DC/AC Inverters with Two Switches 94 3.3 Single-Phase DC/AC Inverters with a Four-Switch Bipolar Switching Method 106 3.3.1 Pulse Width Modulation with Unipolar Voltage Switching for a Single-Phase Full-Bridge Inverter 110 3.4 Three-Phase DC/AC Inverters 113 3.5 Pulse Width Modulation Methods 114 3.5.1 The Triangular Method 114 3.5.2 The Identity Method 119 3.6 Analysis of DC/AC Three-Phase Inverters 120 3.7 Microgrid of Renewable Energy Systems 130 3.8 DC/DC Converters in Green Energy Systems 133 3.8.1 The Step-Up Converter 134 3.8.2 The Step-Down Converter 144 3.8.3 The Buck–Boost Converter 151 3.9 Rectifiers 156 3.10 Pulse Width Modulation Rectifiers 160 3.11 A Three-Phase Voltage Source Rectifier Utilizing Sinusoidal PWM Switching 163 3.12 The Sizing of an Inverter for Microgrid Operation 167 3.13 The Sizing of a Rectifier for Microgrid Operation 169 3.14 The Sizing of DC/DC Converters for Microgrid Operation 170 Problems 171 References 176 4 Smart Power Grid Systems 177 4.1 Introduction 177 4.2 Power Grid Operation 178 4.3 Vertically and Market-Structured Power Grid 184 4.4 The Operations Control of a Power Grid 187 4.5 Load Frequency Control 187 4.6 Automatic Generation Control 193 4.7 Operating Reserve Calculation 198 4.8 Basic Concepts of a Smart Power Grid 199 4.9 The Load Factor 206 4.10 The Load Factor and Real-Time Pricing 209 4.11 A Cyber-Controlled Smart Grid 212 4.12 Smart Grid Development 214 4.13 Smart Microgrid Renewable and Green Energy Systems 216 4.14 A Power Grid Steam Generator 223 4.15 Power Grid Modeling 234 Problems 240 References 245 5 Solar Energy Systems 247 5.1 Introduction 247 5.2 The Solar Energy Conversion Process: Thermal Power Plants 251 5.3 Photovoltaic Power Conversion 253 5.4 Photovoltaic Materials 253 5.5 Photovoltaic Characteristics 255 5.6 Photovoltaic Efficiency 258 5.7 The Design of Photovoltaic Systems 262 5.8 The Modeling of a Photovoltaic Module 277 5.9 The Measurement of Photovoltaic Performance 278 5.10 The Maximum Power Point of a Photovoltaic Array 278 5.11 A Battery Storage System 292 5.12 A Storage System Based on a Single-Cell Battery 294 5.13 The Energy Yield of a Photovoltaic Module and the Angle of Incidence 317 5.14 The State of Photovoltaic Generation Technology 318 Problems 318 References 326 6 Microgrid Wind Energy Systems 328 6.1 Introduction 328 6.2 Wind Power 329 6.3 Wind Turbine Generators 331 6.4 The Modeling of Induction Machines 334 6.4.1 Calculation of Slip 343 6.4.2 The Equivalent Circuit of an Induction Machine 343 6.5 Power Flow Analysis of an Induction Machine 346 6.6 The Operation of an Induction Generator 351 6.7 Dynamic Performance 366 6.8 The Doubly Fed Induction Generator 372 6.9 Brushless Doubly Fed Induction Generator Systems 375 6.10 Variable-Speed Permanent Magnet Generators 376 6.11 A Variable-Speed Synchronous Generator 377 6.12 A Variable-Speed Generator with a Converter Isolated from the Grid 378 Problems 380 References 384 7 Load Flow Analysis of Power Grids and Microgrids 386 7.1 Introduction 386 7.2 Voltage Calculation in Power Grid Analysis 387 7.3 The Power Flow Problem 391 7.4 Load Flow Study as a Power System Engineering Tool 392 7.5 Bus Types 392 7.6 General Formulation of the Power Flow Problem 397 7.7 Algorithm for Calculation of Bus Admittance Model 400 7.7.1 The History of Algebra, Algorithm, and Number Systems 400 7.7.2 Bus Admittance Algorithm 402 7.8 The Bus Impedance Algorithm 403 7.9 Formulation of the Load Flow Problem 404 7.10 The Gauss–Seidel YBUS Algorithm 407 7.11 The Gauss–Seidel ZBUS Algorithm 412 7.12 Comparison of the YBUS and ZBUS Power Flow Solution Methods 419 7.13 The Synchronous and Asynchronous Operation of Microgrids 420 7.14 An Advanced Power Flow Solution Method: The Newton–Raphson Algorithm 422 7.14.1 The Newton–Raphson Algorithm 425 7.15 General Formulation of the Newton–Raphson Algorithm 430 7.16 The Decoupled Newton–Raphson Algorithm 434 7.17 The Fast Decoupled Load Flow Algorithm 435 7.18 Analysis of a Power Flow Problem 436 Problems 448 References 461 8 Power Grid and Microgrid Fault Studies 462 8.1 Introduction 462 8.2 Power Grid Fault Current Calculation 464 8.3 Symmetrical Components 468 8.4 Sequence Networks for Power Generators 473 8.5 The Modeling of Wind and PV Generating Stations 476 8.6 Sequence Networks for Balanced Three-Phase Transmission Lines 477 8.7 Ground Current Flow in Balanced Three-Phase Transformers 479 8.8 Zero Sequence Network 481 8.8.1 Transformers 481 8.8.2 Load Connections 482 8.8.3 Power Grid 484 8.9 Fault Studies 487 8.9.1 Balanced Three-Phase Fault Analysis 490 8.9.2 Unbalanced Faults 508 8.9.3 Single-Line-to-Ground Faults 508 8.9.4 Double-Line-to-Ground Faults 511 8.9.5 Line-to-Line Faults 513 Problems 527 References 533 9 Smart Devices and Energy Efficiency Monitoring Systems 534 9.1 Introduction 534 9.2 Kilowatt-Hour Measurements 535 9.3 Current and Voltage Measurements 536 9.4 Power Measurements at 60 or 50HZ 537 9.5 Analog-to-Digital Conversions 538 9.6 Root Mean Square (RMS) Measurement Devices 538 9.7 Energy Monitoring Systems 539 9.8 Smart Meters 539 9.9 Power Monitoring and Scheduling 540 9.10 Communication Systems 541 9.11 Network Security and Software 543 9.12 Smartphone Applications 546 9.13 Summary 546 Problems 547 Further Reading 548 10 Load Estimation and Classification 549 10.1 Introduction 549 10.2 Load Estimation of a Residential Load 549 10.3 Service Feeder and Metering 557 10.3.1 Assumed Wattages 557 Problems 560 References 562 11 Energy Saving and Cost Estimation of Incandescent and Light-Emitting Diodes 563 11.1 Building Lighting with Incandescent Bulbs 563 11.2 Comparative Performance of LED, Incandescent, and LFC Lighting 564 11.3 Building Load Estimation 566 11.4 Led Energy Saving 569 11.5 Return on Investment on LED Lighting 571 11.6 Annual Carbon Emissions 572 Problems 572 References 572 Appendix A Complex Numbers 573 Appendix B Transmission Line and Distribution Typical Data 576 Appendix C Energy Yield of Photovoltaic Panels and Angle of Incidence 581 Appendix D Wind Power 594 Index 599

    15 in stock

    £113.36

  • Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisINTRODUCTION TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY The revised new edition of the classic textbook is an essential resource for anyone working with today's advancements in both digital and analog devices, communications systems, as well as power/energy generation and distribution. Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility provides thorough coverage of the techniques and methodologies used to design and analyze electronic systems that function acceptably in their electromagnetic environment. Assuming no prior familiarity with electromagnetic compatibility, this user-friendly textbook first explains fundamental EMC concepts and technologies before moving on to more advanced topics in EMC system design. This third edition reflects the results of an extensive detailed review of the entire second edition, embracing and maintaining the content that has stood the test of time, such as from the theory of electromagnetic phenomena and associated mathematics, to tTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 1 1.1 Aspects of EMC 2 1.2 Electrical Dimensions and Waves 9 1.3 Decibels and Common EMC Units 16 1.4 Summary 30 2 EMC Requirements for Electronic Systems 35 2.1 Governmental Requirements 36 2.2 Additional Product Requirements 62 2.3 Design Constraints for Products 63 2.4 Advantages of EMC Design 64 3 Signal Spectra--the Relationship between the Time Domain and the Frequency Domain 71 3.1 Periodic Signals 71 3.2 Spectra of Digital Waveforms 93 3.3 Spectrum Analyzers 113 3.4 Representation of Nonperiodic Waveforms 118 3.5 Representation of Random (Data) Signals 121 4 Transmission Lines and Signal Integrity 133 4.1 The Transmission-Line Equations 136 4.2 The Per-Unit-Length Parameters 139 4.3 The Time-Domain Solution 155 4.4 High-Speed Digital Interconnects and Signal Integrity 170 4.5 Sinusoidal Excitation of the Line and the Phasor Solution 192 4.6 Lumped-Circuit Approximate Models 210 5 Nonideal Behavior of Components 221 5.1 Wires 222 5.2 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Lands 232 5.3 Effect of Component Leads 235 5.4 Resistors 237 5.5 Capacitors 243 5.6 Inductors 251 5.7 Ferromagnetic Materials--Saturation and Frequency Response 255 5.8 Ferrite Beads 258 5.9 Common-Mode Chokes 261 5.10 Electromechanical Devices 264 5.11 Digital Circuit Devices 269 5.12 Effect of Component Variability 270 5.13 Mechanical Switches 270 6 Conducted Emissions and Susceptibility 287 6.1 Measurement of Conducted Emissions 288 6.2 Power Supply Filters 294 6.3 Power Supplies 310 6.4 Power Supply and Filter Placement 319 6.5 Conducted Susceptibility 321 7 Antennas 325 7.1 Elemental Dipole Antennas 325 7.2 The Half-Wave Dipole and Quarter-Wave Monopole Antennas 332 7.3 Antenna Arrays 342 7.4 Characterization of Antennas 349 7.5 The FRIIs Transmission Equation 365 7.6 Effects of Reflections 368 7.7 Broadband Measurement Antennas 381 7.8 Antenna Modeling and Simulation 388 8 Radiated Emissions and Susceptibility 397 8.1 Simple Emission Models for Wires and PCB Lands 398 8.2 Simple Susceptibility Models for Wires and PCB Lands 423 9 Crosstalk 445 9.1 Three-Conductor Transmission Lines and Crosstalk 446 9.2 The Transmission-Line Equations for Lossless Lines 449 9.3 The Per-Unit-Length Parameters 452 9.4 The Inductive--Capacitive Coupling Approximate Model 476 9.5 Shielded Wires 500 9.6 Twisted Wires 529 10 Shielding 557 10.1 Shielding Effectiveness 561 10.2 Shielding Effectiveness: Far-Field Sources 563 10.3 Shielding Effectiveness: Near-Field Sources 576 10.4 Low-Frequency, Magnetic Field Shielding 581 10.5 Effects of Apertures 585 11 System Design for EMC 593 11.1 Changing the Way we Think About Electrical Phenomena 597 11.2 What do we Mean by the Term "Ground" 605 11.3 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Design 636 11.4 System Configuration and Design 655 11.5 Diagnostic Tools 672 Appendix A The Phasor Solution Method 683 A.1 Solving Differential Equations for their Sinusoidal, Steady-State Solution 683 A.2 Solving Electric Circuits for Their Sinusoidal, Steady-State Response 687 Appendix B The Electromagnetic Field Equations and Waves 693 B.1 Vector Analysis 694 B.2 Maxwell’s Equations 701 B.3 Boundary Conditions 720 B.4 Sinusoidal Steady State 724 B.5 Power Flow 725 B.6 Uniform Plane Waves 726 B.7 Static (DC) Electromagnetic Field Relations--a Special Case 741 Appendix C Computer Codes for Calculating the Per-Unit-Length (PUL) Parameters and Crosstalk of Multiconductor Transmission Lines 753 C.1 WIDESEP.FOR for Computing the PUL Parameter Matrices of Widely Spaced Wires 754 C.2 RIBBON.FOR for Computing the PUL Parameter Matrices of Ribbon Cables 758 C.3 PCB.FOR for Computing The PUL Parameter Matrices of Printed Circuit Boards 760 C.4 MSTRP.FOR for Computing the PUL Parameter Matrices of Coupled Microstrip Lines 761 C.5 STRPLINE.FOR for Computing the PUL Parameter Matrices of Coupled Striplines 762 Appendix D A Spice (PSPICE, LTSPICE, etc.) Tutorial and Applications Guide 765 D.1 Creating a Spice or Pspice Simulation 766 D.2 Creating an Ltspice Simulation 777 D.3 Lumped-Circuit Approximate Models 785 D.4 An Exact Spice (Pspice) Model for Lossless, Coupled Lines 788 D.5 Use of Spice (Pspice) in Fourier Analysis 805 D.6 Spicemtl.For for Computing a Spice (Pspice) Subcircuit Model of a Lossless, Multiconductor Transmission Line 815 D.7 Spicelpi.For for Computing a Spice (Pspice) Subcircuit of a Lumped-Pi Model of a Lossless, Multiconductor Transmission Line 817 Problems 818 References 820 Appendix E A Brief History of Electromagnetic Compatibility 823 E.1 History of EMC 823 E.2 Examples 825 Index 827

    15 in stock

    £98.96

  • Teach Yourself Electricity and Electronics

    McGraw-Hill Education Teach Yourself Electricity and Electronics

    1 in stock

    Book SynopsisLearn electricity and electronics fundamentals and up-to-date applicationsâall without taking a formal courseThis fully updated guide offers practical, easy-to-follow instruction on electricity and electronics. Written by a pair of experienced instructors, Teach Yourself Electricity and Electronics, Seventh Edition features plain language explanations and step-by-step lessons that make it easy to understand the material quickly. Throughout, detailed illustrations and practical examples reinforce key concepts. This new edition brings the book up to date with modern electronics and places much more emphasis on the use of Integrated Circuits and practical electronics design. You will also get access to a valuable online exam to test your knowledge and identify areas for further study.This thoroughly revised seventh edition covers: Direct current (DC) circuits Electrical units Resistors Cells and batteries Magnetism<

    1 in stock

    £23.39

  • Reliability Analysis Using MINITAB and Python

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Reliability Analysis Using MINITAB and Python

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisReliability Analysis Using MINITAB and Python Complete overview of the theory and fundamentals of Reliability Analysis applied with Minitab and Python tools Reliability Analysis Using Minitab and Python expertly applies Minitab and Python programs to the field of reliability engineering, presenting basic concepts and explaining step-by-step how to implement statistical distributions and reliability analysis methods using the two programming languages. The textbook enables readers to effectively use software to efficiently process massive amounts of data while also reducing human error. Examples and case studies as well as exercises and questions are included throughout to enable a smooth learning experience. Excel files containing the sample data and Minitab and Python example files are also provided. Students who have basic knowledge of probability and statistics will find this textbook highly approachable. Nonetheless, it also covers material on basic statistics at the beginning, soTable of ContentsAbout the Author ix Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii About the Companion Website xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Reliability Concepts 1 1.1.1 Reliability in Our Lives 1 1.1.2 History of Reliability 2 1.1.3 Definition of Reliability 2 1.1.4 Quality and Reliability 3 1.1.5 The Importance of Reliability 4 1.2 Failure Concepts 5 1.2.1 Definition of Failure 5 1.2.2 Causes of Failure 5 1.2.3 Types of Failure Time 7 1.2.4 The Reliability Bathtub Curve 12 1.3 Summary 16 2 Basic Concepts of Probability 19 2.1 Probability 19 2.1.1 The Importance of Probability in Reliability 20 2.2 Joint Probability with Independence 20 2.3 Union Probability 21 2.4 Conditional Probability 22 2.5 Joint Probability with Dependence 22 2.6 Mutually Exclusive Events 23 2.7 Complement Rule 24 2.8 Total Probability 24 2.9 Bayes’ Rule 25 2.10 Summary 26 3 Lifetime Distributions 29 3.1 Probability Distributions 29 3.1.1 Random Variables 29 3.2 Discrete Probability Distribution 30 3.3 Continuous Probability Distribution 32 3.3.1 Reliability Concepts 33 3.3.2 Failure Rate 35 3.4 Exponential Distribution 37 3.4.1 Exponential Lack of Memory Property 40 3.4.2 Excel Practice 41 3.4.3 Minitab Practice 41 3.4.4 Python Practice 43 3.5 Weibull Distribution 46 3.5.1 Excel Practice 52 3.5.2 Minitab Practice 52 3.5.3 Python Practice 53 3.6 Normal Distribution 54 3.6.1 Excel Practice 60 3.6.2 Minitab Practice 60 3.6.3 Python Practice 62 3.7 Lognormal Distribution 63 3.7.1 Excel Practice 66 3.7.2 Minitab Practice 66 3.7.3 Python Practice 68 3.8 Summary 70 4 Reliability Data Plotting 77 4.1 Straight Line Properties 77 4.2 Least Squares Fit 79 4.2.1 Excel Practice 81 4.2.2 Minitab Practice 82 4.2.3 Python Practice 82 4.3 Linear Rectification 84 4.4 Exponential Distribution Plotting 84 4.4.1 Excel Practice 92 4.4.2 Minitab Practice 92 4.4.3 Python Practice 94 4.5 Weibull Distribution Plotting 96 4.5.1 Minitab Practice 99 4.5.2 Python Practice 100 4.6 Normal Distribution Plotting 103 4.6.1 Minitab Practice 105 4.6.2 Python Practice 105 4.7 Lognormal Distribution Plotting 106 4.7.1 Minitab Practice 108 4.7.2 Python Practice 110 4.8 Summary 111 5 Accelerated Life Testing 115 5.1 Accelerated Testing Theory 115 5.2 Exponential Distribution Acceleration 117 5.3 Weibull Distribution Acceleration 118 5.3.1 Minitab Practice 119 5.3.2 Python Practice 120 5.4 Arrhenius Model 123 5.4.1 Minitab Practice 125 5.4.2 Python Practice 127 5.5 Summary 129 6 System Failure Modeling 131 6.1 Reliability Block Diagram 131 6.2 Series System Model 132 6.3 Parallel System Model 135 6.4 Combined Serial–Parallel System Model 138 6.5 k-out-of-n System Model 140 6.6 Minimal Paths and Minimal Cuts 142 6.7 Summary 148 7 Repairable Systems 151 7.1 Corrective Maintenance 151 7.2 Preventive Maintenance 152 7.3 Mean Time between Failures 152 7.4 Mean Time to Repair 153 7.5 Availability 153 7.5.1 Inherent Availability 153 7.5.2 Achieved Availability 154 7.5.3 Operational Availability 155 7.5.4 System Availability 156 7.6 Maintainability 156 7.7 Preventive Maintenance Scheduling 157 7.7.1 Python Practice 160 7.8 Summary 161 8 Case Studies 165 8.1 Parametric Reliability Analysis 165 8.1.1 Description of Case Study 166 8.1.2 Minitab Practice 166 8.1.3 Python Practice 177 8.2 Nonparametric Reliability Analysis 184 8.2.1 Description of Case Study 184 8.2.2 Minitab Practice 185 8.2.3 Python Practice 189 8.3 Driverless Car Failure Data Analysis 190 8.3.1 Description of Case Study 190 8.3.2 Minitab Practice 193 8.3.3 Python Practice 199 8.4 Warranty Analysis 202 8.4.1 Description of Case Study 202 8.4.2 Minitab Practice 204 8.5 Stress–Strength Interference Analysis 210 8.5.1 Description of Case Study 210 8.5.2 Minitab Practice 211 8.5.3 Python Practice 213 8.6 Summary 214 Index 219

    15 in stock

    £88.65

  • Programmable Logic Controllers ISE

    McGraw-Hill Education Programmable Logic Controllers ISE

    2 in stock

    Book SynopsisThe sixth edition of Programmable Logic Controllers provides an up-to-date introduction to all aspects of PLC programming, installation, and maintaining procedures. The text is written in an easy-to-read style designed for students with no prior PLC experience.This edition is available in Connect with SmartBook 2.0. Instructor resources for this title include: Lecture PowerPoints, an Image Library, Instructor Solutions Manual, LogixPro Lab Manual Answer Key, and the RSLogix 5000 Lab Manual Answer Key.Table of Contents1 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs): An Overview2 PLC Hardware Components3 Number Systems and Codes4 Fundamentals of Logic5 Basics of PLC Programming6 Developing Fundamental PLC Wiring Diagrams and Ladder Logic Programs7 Programming Timers8 Programming Counters9 Program Control Instructions10 Data Manipulation Instructions11 Math Instructions12 Sequencer and Shift Register Instructions13 PLC Installation Practices, Editing, and Troubleshooting14 Process Control, Network Systems, and SCADA15 ControlLogix Controllers

    2 in stock

    £54.14

  • AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Study Guide With

    John Wiley & Sons Inc AWS Certified Cloud Practitioner Study Guide With

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisTable of ContentsIntroduction xxiii Assessment Test xxix Chapter 1 The Cloud 1 What Is Cloud Computing? 2 Highly Available and Scalable Resources 2 Professionally Secured Infrastructure 3 Metered Payment Model 3 Server Virtualization: The Basics 4 Cloud Platform Models 5 Infrastructure as a Service 5 Platform as a Service 5 Software as a Service 5 Serverless Workloads 6 Scalability and Elasticity 6 Scalability 7 Elasticity 7 Summary 8 Exam Essentials 9 Review Questions 10 Chapter 2 Understanding Your AWS Account 13 The Free Tier 14 How Does the Free Tier Work? 15 Tracking Your Free Tier Usage 15 What’s Available Under the Free Tier? 17 Product Pricing 18 Finding AWS Pricing Documentation 18 Working with the AWS Pricing Calculator 19 Service Limits 21 Billing and Cost Management 21 The AWS Billing Dashboard 21 AWS Budgets 22 Monitoring Your Costs 23 AWS Organizations 24 Summary 24 Exam Essentials 24 Review Questions 26 Chapter 3 Getting Support on AWS 29 Support Plans 30 Support Plan Pricing 30 The Basic Support Plan 32 The Developer Support Plan 33 The Business Support Plan 33 The Enterprise Support Plan 33 AWS Professional Services 34 Documentation and Online Help 34 Documentation 34 Discussion Forums 36 Trusted Advisor 37 Summary 39 Exam Essentials 39 Review Questions 40 Chapter 4 Understanding the AWS Environment 45 AWS Global Infrastructure: AWS Regions 46 Regionally Based Services 48 Globally Based Services 49 Service Endpoints 50 AWS Global Infrastructure: Availability Zones 50 Availability Zone Designations 51 Availability Zone Networking 52 Availability Zones and High Availability 52 AWS Global Infrastructure: Edge Locations 53 Edge Locations and CloudFront 54 Regional Edge Cache Locations 55 AWS Global Infrastructure: Extending the Cloud 55 AWS Outposts 55 AWS Local Zones 56 AWS Wavelength 56 The AWS Shared Responsibility Model 56 Managed Resources 58 Unmanaged Resources 58 Service Health Status 58 AWS Acceptable Use Policy 59 Summary 59 Exam Essentials 60 Review Questions 61 Chapter 5 Securing Your AWS Resources 65 AWS Identity and Access Management 66 Protecting the Root User 66 Authentication 67 Users, Groups, and Roles 70 Providing Federated Access 72 Credential Report 73 Encryption 73 Regulatory Compliance (AWS Artifact) 74 Other AWS Security and Compliance Tools 74 Summary 75 Exam Essentials 76 Review Questions 77 Chapter 6 Working with Your AWS Resources 81 The AWS Management Console 82 Accessing the AWS Management Console 83 Opening a Service Console 85 Working with Shortcuts 85 Selecting a Region 85 The Account Name Menu 87 Resource Groups 88 Tag Editor 89 Tagging Strategies 90 The AWS Console Mobile Application 91 The AWS Command- Line Interface 95 Requirements 96 Installation 97 Software Development Kits 99 Mobile Software Development Kits 99 Internet of Things Device Software Development Kits 100 CloudWatch 100 CloudWatch Metrics 101 CloudWatch Alarms 101 CloudWatch Dashboards 102 CloudWatch Logs 102 CloudWatch Events 104 CloudTrail 104 API and Non- API Events 105 Management and Data Events 105 Event History 105 Trails 106 Log File Integrity Validation 106 Cost Explorer 106 Cost and Usage 106 Reservation Reports 108 Reserved Instance Recommendations 109 AWS Billing Conductor 110 AWS Config 111 The Configuration Recorder, Items, and History 111 Configuration Snapshots 112 Managed and Custom Rules 112 AWS Control Tower 112 AWS License Manager 112 Summary 113 Exam Essentials 113 Review Questions 115 Chapter 7 The Core Compute Services 119 Deploying Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud Servers 120 Amazon Machine Images 120 Understanding EC2 Instance Types 123 Server Storage: Elastic Block Store and Instance Store Volumes 124 Understanding EC2 Pricing Models 125 Simplified Deployments Through Managed Services 127 Amazon Lightsail 127 AWS Elastic Beanstalk 128 Deploying Container and Serverless Workloads 128 Containers 129 Serverless Functions 129 Summary 129 Exam Essentials 130 Review Questions 132 Chapter 8 The Core Storage Services 137 Simple Storage Service 138 Objects and Buckets 138 S3 Storage Classes 139 Access Permissions 142 Encryption 143 Versioning 144 Object Life-Cycle Configurations 144 S3 Glacier 145 Archives and Vaults 145 Retrieval Options 146 AWS Storage Gateway 146 File Gateways 147 Volume Gateways 147 Tape Gateways 147 AWS Snow Family 148 Snowcone 148 Snowball 148 Snowmobile 151 Other Storage- Related Services 151 AWS Transfer Family 151 Amazon FSx 151 AWS Elastic Disaster Recovery 152 Summary 152 Exam Essentials 153 Review Questions 154 Chapter 9 The Core Database Services 159 Database Models 160 Relational Databases 160 Structured Query Language 162 Nonrelational (No- SQL) Databases 162 Amazon ElastiCache 163 Amazon MemoryDB 163 Amazon Relational Database Service 164 Database Engines 164 Licensing 164 Instance Classes 165 Scaling Vertically 166 Storage 166 Scaling Horizontally with Read Replicas 167 High Availability with Multi- AZ 167 Backup and Recovery 168 Determining Your Recovery Point Objective 168 Migrating Data to Your Database 168 DynamoDB 169 Items and Tables 169 Scaling Horizontally 170 Queries and Scans 170 Amazon Redshift 171 Analytics 172 Amazon Kinesis 172 Amazon Managed Streaming for Apache Kafka (Amazon MSK) 174 Amazon Elastic MapReduce 174 Amazon OpenSearch Service 175 AWS Data Exchange 175 Summary 175 Exam Essentials 176 Review Questions 178 Chapter 10 The Core Networking Services 183 Virtual Private Cloud 184 VPC CIDR Blocks 184 Subnets 185 Internet Access 186 Security Groups 186 Network Access Control Lists 186 VPC Peering 186 Virtual Private Networks 187 Direct Connect 187 AWS Global Accelerator 187 AWS Network Firewall 188 AWS Firewall Manager 188 AWS Web Application Firewall 188 Route 53 189 Resource Records 189 Domain Name Registration 189 Hosted Zones 190 Routing Policies 190 Health Checks 191 Traffic Flow and Traffic Policies 191 CloudFront 192 Summary 192 Exam Essentials 193 Review Questions 194 Chapter 11 Automating Your AWS Workloads 199 Automation 200 The Imperative Approach 200 The Declarative Approach 201 Infrastructure as Code 201 CloudFormation 201 Templates 202 Stacks 202 CloudFormation vs. the AWS cli 203 AWS Developer Tools 204 CodeCommit 204 CodeBuild 205 CodeDeploy 206 CodePipeline 207 CodeStar 208 CodeArtifact 209 EC2 Auto Scaling 210 Launch Configurations and Launch Templates 210 Auto Scaling Groups 210 Scaling Actions 211 Configuration Management 211 Systems Manager 212 OpsWorks 213 Summary 215 Exam Essentials 216 Review Questions 217 Chapter 12 Common Use- Case Scenarios 221 The Well- Architected Framework 222 Reliability 223 Performance Efficiency 223 Security 223 Cost Optimization 224 Operational Excellence 225 AWS Well- Architected Tool 225 A Highly Available Web Application Using Auto Scaling and Elastic Load Balancing 226 Creating an Inbound Security Group Rule 227 Creating an Application Load Balancer 228 Creating a Launch Template 231 Creating an Auto Scaling Group 232 Static Website Hosting Using S 3 234 Machine Learning 236 Amazon Comprehend 237 Amazon Kendra 237 Amazon Lex 237 Amazon Rekognition 238 Amazon SageMaker 238 Amazon Textract 238 Amazon Transcribe 238 Amazon Translate 239 Summary 239 Exam Essentials 239 Review Questions 241 Appendix A Answers to Review Questions 245 Chapter 1: The Cloud 246 Chapter 2: Understanding Your AWS Account 246 Chapter 3: Getting Support on AWS 247 Chapter 4: Understanding the AWS Environment 249 Chapter 5: Securing Your AWS Resources 250 Chapter 6: Working with Your AWS Resources 252 Chapter 7: The Core Compute Services 254 Chapter 8: The Core Storage Services 255 Chapter 9: The Core Database Services 257 Chapter 10: The Core Networking Services 259 Chapter 11: Automating Your AWS Workloads 261 Chapter 12: Common Use- Case Scenarios 262 Appendix B Additional Services 265 Activate for Startups 266 Amazon EventBridge 266 AppStream 2.0 266 Athena 267 AWS Amplify 267 AWS AppSync 267 AWS Batch 267 AWS CloudShell 268 AWS Device Farm 268 AWS Step Functions 268 Backup 268 Cognito 269 Connect 269 Database Migration Service 269 Elastic File System 269 Elastic MapReduce 270 Glue 270 Inspector 270 IoT Core 270 IoT Greengrass 270 Iq 271 Kinesis 271 Macie 271 Managed Services (AMS) 271 Neptune 272 Simple Queue Service 272 WorkDocs 272 WorkSpaces 272 X- Ray 272 Index 273

    15 in stock

    £31.88

  • Apple Watch For Dummies

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Apple Watch For Dummies

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisStop looking at your phoneand start looking at your Apple Watch Much more than a time-telling device, the Apple Watch is your very own wrist-sized computer. And Apple Watch For Dummies is the most trusted guide for new and upgrading users. Learn how to check your email, make a phone call, look at tomorrow''s weather forecast, and track your calorie burn, all right on your wrist. Dummies helps you navigate the interface, use helpful Siri shortcuts, make wireless payments, and more. This 2023 Edition is fully updated for the latest version of the Apple Watch and watchOS. Learn how to connect your Apple Watch to your phone and start receiving messages Check the weather, track your fitness, and use apps on your Watch Make payments wirelessly by tapping your Watch at points-of-sale Discover all the features of the newest Apple Watch models This is the perfect Dummies guide for first-time Apple Watch users, as well as peopleTable of ContentsIntroduction 1 Part 1: Getting to Know Apple Watch 5 Chapter 1: Watch This: Introducing Apple Watch 7 Chapter 2: Time Out: Setting Up Your Apple Watch 37 Chapter 3: Control Freak: Mastering Apple Watch’s Interface and Apps 69 Part 2: Just the Tasks, Ma’am! 101 Chapter 4: It’s About Time: Setting Watch Faces, Alarms, Timers, and More 103 Chapter 5: Keep in Touch: Using Apple Watch for Calls, Texts, and More 157 Chapter 6: In the Know: Staying Informed with Apple Watch 193 Part 3: It’s All in the Wrist 237 Chapter 7: Siri Supersized: Gaining the Most from Your Personal Assistant 239 Chapter 8: Apple Watch as Your Workout Buddy and Digital Doctor 259 Chapter 9: Mucho Media: Managing Your Music, Movies, Apple TV, and More 321 Chapter 10: Making Mobile Payments with Apple Watch Controlling Your Smart Home 347 Part 4: More Apple Watch Tips and Tricks 373 Chapter 11: App It Up: Customizing Apple Watch with Awesome Apps and More 375 Chapter 12: Extra! Extra! Having Fun with Apple Watch 393 Part 5: The Part of Tens 407 Chapter 13: Ten Cool Things to Do with Your Apple Watch 409 Index 419

    15 in stock

    £19.19

  • Fundamentals of Electric Propulsion

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Fundamentals of Electric Propulsion

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisFundamentals of Electric Propulsion Understand the fundamental basis of spaceflight with this cutting-edge guide As spacecraft engineering continues to advance, so too do the propulsion methods by which human beings can seek out the stars. Ion thrusters and Hall thrusters have been the subject of considerable innovation in recent years, and spacecraft propulsion has never been more efficient. For professionals within and adjacent to spacecraft engineering, this is critical knowledge that can alter the future of space flight. Fundamentals of Electric Propulsion offers a thorough grounding in electric propulsion for spacecraft, particularly the features and mechanisms underlying Ion and Hall thrusters. Updated in the light of rapidly expanding knowledge, the second edition of this essential guide detailed coverage of thruster principles, plasma physics, and more. It reflects the historic output of the legendary Jet Propulsion Laboratory and promises to contiTable of ContentsNote from the Series Editor xi Foreword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Electric Propulsion Background 2 1.2 Electric Thruster Types 3 1.2.1 Resistojet 3 1.2.2 Arcjet 4 1.2.3 Electrospray/FEEP Thruster 4 1.2.4 Ion Thruster 4 1.2.5 Hall Thruster 4 1.2.6 Magnetoplasmadynamic (MPD) Thruster 4 1.2.7 Pulsed Plasma Thruster (PPT) 5 1.2.8 Pulsed Inductive Thruster (PIT) 5 1.3 Electrostatic Thrusters 6 1.3.1 Ion Thrusters 6 1.3.2 Hall Thrusters 7 1.4 Electromagnetic Thrusters 7 1.4.1 Magnetoplasmadynamic Thrusters 8 1.4.2 Pulsed Plasma Thrusters 9 1.4.3 Pulsed Inductive Thrusters 9 1.5 Beam/Plume Characteristics 11 References 12 2 Thruster Principles 15 2.1 The Rocket Equation 15 2.2 Force Transfer in Electric Thrusters 17 2.2.1 Ion Thrusters 17 2.2.2 Hall Thrusters 18 2.2.3 Electromagnetic Thrusters 19 2.3 Thrust 20 2.4 Specific Impulse 23 2.5 Thruster Efficiency 25 2.6 Power Dissipation 27 2.7 Neutral Densities and Ingestion 29 Problems 30 References 31 3 Basic Plasma Physics 33 3.1 Introduction 33 3.2 Maxwell’s Equations 33 3.3 Single Particle Motions 34 3.4 Particle Energies and Velocities 37 3.5 Plasma as a Fluid 39 3.5.1 Momentum Conservation 39 3.5.2 Particle Conservation 41 3.5.3 Energy Conservation 43 3.6 Diffusion in Partially Ionized Plasma 45 3.6.1 Collisions 46 3.6.2 Diffusion and Mobility Without a Magnetic Field 49 3.6.2.1 Fick’s Law and the Diffusion Equation 50 3.6.2.2 Ambipolar Diffusion Without a Magnetic Field 53 3.6.3 Diffusion Across Magnetic Fields 54 3.6.3.1 Classical Diffusion of Particles across B Fields 54 3.6.3.2 Ambipolar Diffusion Across B Fields 56 3.7 Sheaths at the Boundaries of Plasmas 57 3.7.1 Debye Sheaths 58 3.7.2 Pre-sheaths 60 3.7.3 Child-Langmuir Sheath 62 3.7.4 Generalized Sheath Solution 63 3.7.5 Double Sheaths 65 3.7.6 Summary of Sheath Effects 67 Problems 69 References 70 4 Hollow Cathodes 71 4.1 Introduction 71 4.2 Cathode Configurations 76 4.3 Thermionic Electron Emitters 80 4.4 Insert Region 85 4.5 Orifice Region 100 4.6 Cathode Plume Region 110 4.7 Heating and Thermal Models 117 4.7.1 Hollow Cathode Heaters 117 4.7.2 Heaterless Hollow Cathodes 118 4.7.3 Hollow Cathode Thermal Models 120 4.8 Hollow Cathode Life 122 4.8.1 Dispenser Cathode Insert-Region Plasmas 122 4.8.2 BaO Cathode Insert Temperature 124 4.8.3 Barium Depletion Model 127 4.8.4 Bulk-Material Insert Life 130 4.8.5 Cathode Poisoning 131 4.9 Keeper Wear and Life 134 4.10 Discharge Behavior and Instabilities 136 4.10.1 Discharge Modes 136 4.10.2 Suppression of Instabilities and Energetic Ion Production 141 4.10.3 Hollow Cathode Discharge Characteristics 143 Problems 146 References 147 5 Ion Thruster Plasma Generators 155 5.1 Introduction 155 5.2 Idealized Ion Thruster Plasma Generator 157 5.3 DC Discharge Ion Thrusters 162 5.3.1 Generalized 0-D Ring-Cusp Ion Thruster Model 164 5.3.2 Magnetic Multipole Boundaries 166 5.3.3 Electron Confinement 167 5.3.4 Ion Confinement at the Anode Wall 170 5.3.5 Neutral and Primary Densities in the Discharge Chamber 174 5.3.6 Ion and Excited Neutral Production 175 5.3.7 Electron Temperature 177 5.3.8 Primary Electron Density 178 5.3.9 Power and Energy Balance in the Discharge Chamber 180 5.3.10 Discharge Loss 182 5.3.11 Discharge Stability 187 5.3.12 Recycling Behavior 189 5.3.13 Limitations of a 0-D Model 192 5.4 Kaufman Ion Thrusters 193 5.5 rf Ion Thrusters 197 5.6 Microwave Ion Thrusters 206 5.7 2-D Models of the Ion Thruster Discharge Chamber 216 5.7.1 Neutral Atom Model 217 5.7.2 Primary Electron Motion and Ionization Model 219 5.7.3 Discharge Chamber Model Results 221 Problems 223 References 225 6 Ion Thruster Accelerators 229 6.1 Grid Configurations 229 6.2 Ion Accelerator Basics 234 6.3 Ion Optics 237 6.3.1 Ion Trajectories 237 6.3.2 Perveance Limits 240 6.3.3 Grid Expansion and Alignment 241 6.4 Electron Backstreaming 243 6.5 High Voltage Considerations 249 6.5.1 Electrode Breakdown 250 6.5.2 Molybdenum Electrodes 251 6.5.3 Carbon-Carbon Composite Materials 253 6.5.4 Pyrolytic Graphite 254 6.5.5 Voltage Hold-off and Conditioning in Ion Accelerators 255 6.6 Ion Accelerator Grid Life 256 6.6.1 Grid Models 257 6.6.2 Barrel Erosion 260 6.6.3 Pits and Groves Erosion 261 Problems 264 References 265 7 Conventional Hall Thrusters 269 7.1 Introduction 269 7.1.1 Discharge Channel with Dielectric Walls (SPT) 270 7.1.2 Discharge Channel with Metallic Walls (TAL) 271 7.2 Operating Principles and Scaling 273 7.2.1 Crossed-field Structure and the Hall Current 273 7.2.2 Ionization Length and Scaling 276 7.2.3 Plasma Potential and Current Distributions 278 7.3 Performance Models 281 7.3.1 Thruster Efficiency Definitions 281 7.3.2 Multiply Charged Ion Correction 284 7.3.3 Dominant Power Loss Mechanisms 285 7.3.4 Electron Temperature 292 7.3.5 Efficiency of Hall Thrusters with Dielectric Walls 294 7.3.6 Efficiency of TAL Thrusters with Metallic Walls 296 7.3.7 Comparison of Conventional Hall Thrusters with Dielectric and Metallic Walls 297 7.4 Discharge Dynamics and Oscillations 298 7.5 Channel Physics and Numerical Modeling 301 7.5.1 Basic Model Equations 301 7.5.1.1 Electron Motion Perpendicular to the Magnetic Field 302 7.5.1.2 Electron Motion Parallel to the Magnetic Field 304 7.5.1.3 Electron Continuity and Energy Conversation 305 7.5.1.4 Heavy Species: Ion and Neutrals 306 7.5.2 Numerical Modeling and Simulations 308 7.5.2.1 Modeling in One Dimension 308 7.5.2.2 Modeling in Multiple Dimensions 311 7.6 Operational Life of Conventional Hall Thrusters 321 Problems 326 References 328 8 Magnetically Shielded Hall Thrusters 337 8.1 Introduction 337 8.2 First Principles of Magnetic Shielding 338 8.3 The Protective Capabilities of Magnetic Shielding 340 8.3.1 Numerical Simulations 340 8.3.2 Laboratory Experiments and Model Validation 341 8.4 Magnetically Shielded Hall Thrusters with Electrically Conducting Walls 349 8.5 Magnetic Shielding in Low Power Hall Thrusters 351 8.6 Final Remarks on Magnetic Shielding in Hall Thrusters 353 References 355 9 Electromagnetic Thrusters 361 9.1 Introduction 361 9.2 Magnetoplasmadynamic Thrusters 361 9.2.1 Self-Field MPD Thrusters 362 9.2.1.1 Idealized Model of the Self-Field MPD Thruster 363 9.2.1.2 Semi-empirical Model of the Self-Field MPD Thrust 368 9.2.2 Applied-Field MPD Thrusters 369 9.2.2.1 Empirical and Semi-empirical Thrust Models 371 9.2.2.2 First-principles Thrust Model 372 9.2.2.3 Lithium Applied-Field MPD Thrusters 374 9.2.3 Onset Phenomenon 376 9.2.3.1 Anode Starvation 379 9.2.3.2 Plasma Instabilities 380 9.2.3.3 Other Onset Effects 380 9.2.4 MPD Thruster Performance Parameters 380 9.3 Ablative Pulsed Plasma Thrusters 382 9.3.1 Thruster Configurations and Performance 383 9.3.1.1 Rectangular Configurations 386 9.3.1.2 Coaxial Configurations 387 9.3.2 Physics and Modeling 389 9.3.2.1 Numerical Simulations 389 9.3.2.2 First-principles Idealized Models 392 9.4 Pulsed Inductive Thrusters (PIT) 395 9.4.1 Thruster Performance 397 9.4.2 Physics and Modeling 398 9.4.2.1 Numerical Simulations 398 9.4.2.2 First-principles Idealized Modeling 402 References 408 10 Future Directions in Electric Propulsion 417 10.1 Hall Thruster Developments 417 10.1.1 Alternative Propellants 417 10.1.2 Nested Channel Hall Thrusters for Higher Power 418 10.1.3 Double Stage Ionization and Acceleration Regions 419 10.1.4 Multipole Magnetic Fields in Hall Thrusters 420 10.2 Ion Thruster Developments 421 10.2.1 Alternative Propellants 421 10.2.2 Grid Systems for High Isp 422 10.3 Helicon Thruster Development 422 10.4 Magnetic Field Dependent Thrusters 424 10.4.1 Rotating Magnetic Field (RMF) Thrusters 424 10.4.2 Magnetic Induction Plasma Thrusters 425 10.4.3 Magnetic Reconnection Thrusters 426 10.5 Laser-Based Propulsion 427 10.6 Solar Sails 427 10.7 Hollow Cathode Discharge Thrusters 428 References 430 11 Electric Thruster Plumes and Spacecraft Interactions 437 11.1 Introduction 437 11.2 Plume Physics in Ion and Hall Thrusters 438 11.2.1 Plume Measurements 439 11.2.2 Flight Data 440 11.2.3 Laboratory Plume Measurements 442 11.3 Plume Models for Ion and Hall Thrusters 443 11.3.1 Primary Beam Expansion 443 11.3.2 Neutral Gas Plumes 447 11.3.3 Secondary Ion Generation 448 11.3.4 Combined Models and Numerical Simulations 450 11.4 Spacecraft Interactions 453 11.4.1 Momentum of the Plume Particles 453 11.4.2 Sputtering and Contamination 454 11.4.3 Plasma Interactions with Solar Arrays 456 11.5 Interactions with Payloads 458 11.5.1 Microwave Phase Shift 458 11.5.2 Plume Plasma Optical Emission 458 Problems 461 References 464 12 Flight Electric Thrusters 467 12.1 Introduction 467 12.2 Ion Thrusters 467 12.3 Hall Thrusters 476 12.4 Electromagnetic Thrusters 480 References 481 Appendix A Nomenclature 487 Appendix B Gas Flow Units Conversions and Cathode Pressure Estimates 497 Appendix C Energy Loss by Electrons 501 Appendix D Ionization and Excitation Cross Sections for Xenon and Krypton 503 Appendix E Ionization and Excitation Reaction Rates in Maxwellian plasmas 509 Appendix F Electron Relaxation and Thermalization Times 511 Appendix G Clausing Factor Monte Carlo Calculation 515 Index 519

    15 in stock

    £91.80

  • Machine Learning for Business Analytics

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Machine Learning for Business Analytics

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisTable of ContentsForeword by Ravi Bapna xix Foreword by Gareth James xxi Preface to the Second R Edition xxiii Acknowledgments xxvi Part I Preliminaries Chapter 1 Introduction 3 1.1 What Is Business Analytics? 3 1.2 What Is Machine Learning? 5 1.3 Machine Learning, AI, and Related Terms 5 1.4 Big Data 7 1.5 Data Science 8 1.6 Why Are There So Many Different Methods? 8 1.7 Terminology and Notation 9 1.8 Road Maps to This Book 11 Order of Topics 13 Chapter 2 Overview of the Machine Learning Process 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Core Ideas in Machine Learning 18 Classification 18 Prediction 18 Association Rules and Recommendation Systems 18 Predictive Analytics 19 Data Reduction and Dimension Reduction 19 Data Exploration and Visualization 19 Supervised and Unsupervised Learning 20 2.3 The Steps in a Machine Learning Project 21 2.4 Preliminary Steps 23 Organization of Data 23 Predicting Home Values in the West Roxbury Neighborhood 23 Loading and Looking at the Data in R 24 Sampling from a Database 26 Oversampling Rare Events in Classification Tasks 27 Preprocessing and Cleaning the Data 28 2.5 Predictive Power and Overfitting 35 Overfitting 36 Creating and Using Data Partitions 38 2.6 Building a Predictive Model 41 Modeling Process 41 2.7 Using R for Machine Learning on a Local Machine 46 2.8 Automating Machine Learning Solutions 47 Predicting Power Generator Failure 48 Uber’s Michelangelo 50 2.9 Ethical Practice in Machine Learning 52 Machine Learning Software: The State of the Market (by Herb Edelstein) 53 Problems 57 Part II Data Exploration and Dimension Reduction Chapter 3 Data Visualization 63 3.1 Uses of Data Visualization 63 Base R or ggplot? 65 3.2 Data Examples 65 Example 1: Boston Housing Data 65 Example 2: Ridership on Amtrak Trains 67 3.3 Basic Charts: Bar Charts, Line Charts, and Scatter Plots 67 Distribution Plots: Boxplots and Histograms 70 Heatmaps: Visualizing Correlations and Missing Values 73 3.4 Multidimensional Visualization 75 Adding Variables: Color, Size, Shape, Multiple Panels, and Animation 76 Manipulations: Rescaling, Aggregation and Hierarchies, Zooming, Filtering 79 Reference: Trend Lines and Labels 83 Scaling Up to Large Datasets 85 Multivariate Plot: Parallel Coordinates Plot 85 Interactive Visualization 88 3.5 Specialized Visualizations 91 Visualizing Networked Data 91 Visualizing Hierarchical Data: Treemaps 93 Visualizing Geographical Data: Map Charts 95 3.6 Major Visualizations and Operations, by Machine Learning Goal 97 Prediction 97 Classification 97 Time Series Forecasting 97 Unsupervised Learning 98 Problems 99 Chapter 4 Dimension Reduction 101 4.1 Introduction 101 4.2 Curse of Dimensionality 102 4.3 Practical Considerations 102 Example 1: House Prices in Boston 103 4.4 Data Summaries 103 Summary Statistics 104 Aggregation and Pivot Tables 104 4.5 Correlation Analysis 107 4.6 Reducing the Number of Categories in Categorical Variables 109 4.7 Converting a Categorical Variable to a Numerical Variable 111 4.8 Principal Component Analysis 111 Example 2: Breakfast Cereals 111 Principal Components 116 Normalizing the Data 117 Using Principal Components for Classification and Prediction 120 4.9 Dimension Reduction Using Regression Models 121 4.10 Dimension Reduction Using Classification and Regression Trees 121 Problems 123 Part III Performance Evaluation Chapter 5 Evaluating Predictive Performance 129 5.1 Introduction 130 5.2 Evaluating Predictive Performance 130 Naive Benchmark: The Average 131 Prediction Accuracy Measures 131 Comparing Training and Holdout Performance 133 Cumulative Gains and Lift Charts 133 5.3 Judging Classifier Performance 136 Benchmark: The Naive Rule 136 Class Separation 136 The Confusion (Classification) Matrix 137 Using the Holdout Data 138 Accuracy Measures 139 Propensities and Threshold for Classification 139 Performance in Case of Unequal Importance of Classes 143 Asymmetric Misclassification Costs 146 Generalization to More Than Two Classes 149 5.4 Judging Ranking Performance 150 Cumulative Gains and Lift Charts for Binary Data 150 Decile-wise Lift Charts 153 Beyond Two Classes 154 Gains and Lift Charts Incorporating Costs and Benefits 154 Cumulative Gains as a Function of Threshold 155 5.5 Oversampling 156 Creating an Over-sampled Training Set 158 Evaluating Model Performance Using a Non-oversampled Holdout Set 159 Evaluating Model Performance If Only Oversampled Holdout Set Exists 159 Problems 162 Part IV Prediction and Classification Methods Chapter 6 Multiple Linear Regression 167 6.1 Introduction 167 6.2 Explanatory vs. Predictive Modeling 168 6.3 Estimating the Regression Equation and Prediction 170 Example: Predicting the Price of Used Toyota Corolla Cars 171 Cross-validation and caret 175 6.4 Variable Selection in Linear Regression 176 Reducing the Number of Predictors 176 How to Reduce the Number of Predictors 178 Regularization (Shrinkage Models) 183 Problems 188 Chapter 7 k-Nearest Neighbors (kNN) 193 7.1 The k-NN Classifier (Categorical Outcome) 193 Determining Neighbors 194 Classification Rule 194 Example: Riding Mowers 195 Choosing k 196 Weighted k-NN 199 Setting the Cutoff Value 200 k-NN with More Than Two Classes 201 Converting Categorical Variables to Binary Dummies 201 7.2 k-NN for a Numerical Outcome 201 7.3 Advantages and Shortcomings of k-NN Algorithms 204 Problems 205 Chapter 8 The Naive Bayes Classifier 207 8.1 Introduction 207 Threshold Probability Method 208 Conditional Probability 208 Example 1: Predicting Fraudulent Financial Reporting 208 8.2 Applying the Full (Exact) Bayesian Classifier 209 Using the “Assign to the Most Probable Class” Method 210 Using the Threshold Probability Method 210 Practical Difficulty with the Complete (Exact) Bayes Procedure 210 8.3 Solution: Naive Bayes 211 The Naive Bayes Assumption of Conditional Independence 212 Using the Threshold Probability Method 212 Example 2: Predicting Fraudulent Financial Reports, Two Predictors 213 Example 3: Predicting Delayed Flights 214 Working with Continuous Predictors 218 8.4 Advantages and Shortcomings of the Naive Bayes Classifier 220 Problems 223 Chapter 9 Classification and Regression Trees 225 9.1 Introduction 226 Tree Structure 227 Decision Rules 227 Classifying a New Record 227 9.2 Classification Trees 228 Recursive Partitioning 228 Example 1: Riding Mowers 228 Measures of Impurity 231 9.3 Evaluating the Performance of a Classification Tree 235 Example 2: Acceptance of Personal Loan 236 9.4 Avoiding Overfitting 239 Stopping Tree Growth 242 Pruning the Tree 243 Best-Pruned Tree 245 9.5 Classification Rules from Trees 247 9.6 Classification Trees for More Than Two Classes 248 9.7 Regression Trees 249 Prediction 250 Measuring Impurity 250 Evaluating Performance 250 9.8 Advantages and Weaknesses of a Tree 250 9.9 Improving Prediction: Random Forests and Boosted Trees 252 Random Forests 252 Boosted Trees 254 Problems 257 Chapter 10 Logistic Regression 261 10.1 Introduction 261 10.2 The Logistic Regression Model 263 10.3 Example: Acceptance of Personal Loan 264 Model with a Single Predictor 265 Estimating the Logistic Model from Data: Computing Parameter Estimates 267 Interpreting Results in Terms of Odds (for a Profiling Goal) 270 10.4 Evaluating Classification Performance 271 10.5 Variable Selection 273 10.6 Logistic Regression for Multi-Class Classification 274 Ordinal Classes 275 Nominal Classes 276 10.7 Example of Complete Analysis: Predicting Delayed Flights 277 Data Preprocessing 282 Model-Fitting and Estimation 282 Model Interpretation 282 Model Performance 284 Variable Selection 285 Problems 289 Chapter 11 Neural Nets 293 11.1 Introduction 293 11.2 Concept and Structure of a Neural Network 294 11.3 Fitting a Network to Data 295 Example 1: Tiny Dataset 295 Computing Output of Nodes 296 Preprocessing the Data 299 Training the Model 300 Example 2: Classifying Accident Severity 304 Avoiding Overfitting 305 Using the Output for Prediction and Classification 305 11.4 Required User Input 307 11.5 Exploring the Relationship Between Predictors and Outcome 308 11.6 Deep Learning 309 Convolutional Neural Networks (CNNs) 310 Local Feature Map 311 A Hierarchy of Features 311 The Learning Process 312 Unsupervised Learning 312 Example: Classification of Fashion Images 313 Conclusion 320 11.7 Advantages and Weaknesses of Neural Networks 320 Problems 322 Chapter 12 Discriminant Analysis 325 12.1 Introduction 325 Example 1: Riding Mowers 326 Example 2: Personal Loan Acceptance 327 12.2 Distance of a Record from a Class 327 12.3 Fisher’s Linear Classification Functions 329 12.4 Classification Performance of Discriminant Analysis 333 12.5 Prior Probabilities 334 12.6 Unequal Misclassification Costs 334 12.7 Classifying More Than Two Classes 336 Example 3: Medical Dispatch to Accident Scenes 336 12.8 Advantages and Weaknesses 339 Problems 341 Chapter 13 Generating, Comparing, and Combining Multiple Models 345 13.1 Ensembles 346 Why Ensembles Can Improve Predictive Power 346 Simple Averaging or Voting 348 Bagging 349 Boosting 349 Bagging and Boosting in R 349 Stacking 350 Advantages and Weaknesses of Ensembles 351 13.2 Automated Machine Learning (AutoML) 352 AutoML: Explore and Clean Data 352 AutoML: Determine Machine Learning Task 353 AutoML: Choose Features and Machine Learning Methods 354 AutoML: Evaluate Model Performance 354 AutoML: Model Deployment 356 Advantages and Weaknesses of Automated Machine Learning 357 13.3 Explaining Model Predictions 358 13.4 Summary 360 Problems 362 345 Part V Intervention and User Feedback Chapter 14 Interventions: Experiments, Uplift Models, and Reinforcement Learning 367 14.1 A/B Testing 368 Example: Testing a New Feature in a Photo Sharing App 369 The Statistical Test for Comparing Two Groups (T-Test) 370 Multiple Treatment Groups: A/B/n Tests 372 Multiple A/B Tests and the Danger of Multiple Testing 372 14.2 Uplift (Persuasion) Modeling 373 Gathering the Data 374 A Simple Model 376 Modeling Individual Uplift 376 Computing Uplift with R 378 Using the Results of an Uplift Model 378 14.3 Reinforcement Learning 380 Explore-Exploit: Multi-armed Bandits 380 Example of Using a Contextual Multi-Arm Bandit for Movie Recommendations 382 Markov Decision Process (MDP) 383 14.4 Summary 388 Problems 390 Part VI Mining Relationships Among Records Chapter 15 Association Rules and Collaborative Filtering 393 15.1 Association Rules 394 Discovering Association Rules in Transaction Databases 394 Example 1: Synthetic Data on Purchases of Phone Faceplates 394 Generating Candidate Rules 395 The Apriori Algorithm 397 Selecting Strong Rules 397 Data Format 399 The Process of Rule Selection 400 Interpreting the Results 401 Rules and Chance 403 Example 2: Rules for Similar Book Purchases 405 15.2 Collaborative Filtering 407 Data Type and Format 407 Example 3: Netflix Prize Contest 408 User-Based Collaborative Filtering: “People Like You” 409 Item-Based Collaborative Filtering 411 Evaluating Performance 412 Example 4: Predicting Movie Ratings with MovieLens Data 413 Advantages and Weaknesses of Collaborative Filtering 416 Collaborative Filtering vs. Association Rules 417 15.3 Summary 419 Problems 421 Chapter 16 Cluster Analysis 425 16.1 Introduction 426 Example: Public Utilities 427 16.2 Measuring Distance Between Two Records 429 Euclidean Distance 429 Normalizing Numerical Variables 430 Other Distance Measures for Numerical Data 432 Distance Measures for Categorical Data 433 Distance Measures for Mixed Data 434 16.3 Measuring Distance Between Two Clusters 434 Minimum Distance 434 Maximum Distance 435 Average Distance 435 Centroid Distance 435 16.4 Hierarchical (Agglomerative) Clustering 437 Single Linkage 437 Complete Linkage 438 Average Linkage 438 Centroid Linkage 438 Ward’s Method 438 Dendrograms: Displaying Clustering Process and Results 439 Validating Clusters 441 Limitations of Hierarchical Clustering 443 16.5 Non-Hierarchical Clustering: The k-Means Algorithm 444 Choosing the Number of Clusters (k) 445 Problems 450 Part VII Forecasting Time Series Chapter 17 Handling Time Series 455 17.1 Introduction 455 17.2 Descriptive vs. Predictive Modeling 457 17.3 Popular Forecasting Methods in Business 457 Problems 466 Chapter 18 Regression-Based Forecasting 469 18.1 A Model with Trend 469 Linear Trend 469 Exponential Trend 473 Polynomial Trend 474 Problems 489 Chapter 19 Smoothing and Deep Learning Methods for Forecasting 499 19.1 Smoothing Methods: Introduction 500 19.2 Moving Average 500 Centered Moving Average for Visualization 500 Trailing Moving Average for Forecasting 501 Choosing Window Width (w) 504 Problems 516 Part VIII Data Analytics Chapter 20 Social Network Analytics 527 20.1 Introduction 527 20.2 Directed vs. Undirected Networks 529 20.3 Visualizing and Analyzing Networks 530 Plot Layout 530 Edge List 533 Adjacency Matrix 533 Using Network Data in Classification and Prediction 534 Problems 548 Chapter 21 Text Mining 549 21.1 Introduction 549 21.2 The Tabular Representation of Text 550 21.3 Bag-of-Words vs. Meaning Extraction at Document Level 551 Problems 570 Chapter 22 Responsible Data Science 573 22.1 Introduction 573 22.2 Unintentional Harm 574 22.3 Legal Considerations 576 22.4 Principles of Responsible Data Science 577 Non-maleficence 578 Fairness 578 Transparency 579 Accountability 580 Data Privacy and Security 580 Problems 599 Part IX Cases Chapter 23 Cases 603 23.1 Charles Book Club 603 The Book Industry 603 Database Marketing at Charles 604 Machine Learning Techniques 606 Assignment 608 23.2 German Credit 610 Background 610 Data 610 Assignment 614 Index 647

    15 in stock

    £98.96

  • Android Smartphones For Seniors For Dummies

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Android Smartphones For Seniors For Dummies

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisTake command of your Android smartphone. Android Smartphones For Seniors For Dummies is the best no-nonsense guide for members of the older-and-better crowd who want to use their smartphone''s features without making a support call. This fluff-free guide shows you the essentials of a smartphone running the Android operating system. Thanks to larger-print type and full-color images, it''s easy to learn how to turn your phone into a communications, photography, security, and media streaming powerhousewithout wasting time on the features you may never use. You''ll definitely pick up a few tricks to show off to friends and family. Stay organized and keep track of appointments with your smartphone Sharpen your messaging skills and connect with the newest media apps Take photos and videos and share them with friends and family everywhere you go Understand the privacy and security apps in your phone for a safe experience Strea

    15 in stock

    £18.39

  • The Clean Energy Transition: Policies and

    John Wiley and Sons Ltd The Clean Energy Transition: Policies and

    5 in stock

    Book SynopsisIs the goal of a transition to clean energy at all realistic? If so, how could it be accomplished? Climate change poses a formidable challenge for twenty-first-century governments. Unless they can move to a clean energy system built on efficiency, renewables, electrification, and possibly complementary technologies like nuclear energy and carbon capture and storage, it will be all but impossible to avoid the worst impacts of climate change. In this book, Daniel Fiorino provides a comprehensive introduction to the politics and policies of a clean energy transition and how it may unfold nationally and globally. Across its nine chapters, he explores the current energy landscape and the different pathways and pitfalls on the road to decarbonization. All scenarios for decarbonizing, he argues, rely on aggressive efficiency, the rapid scale-up of renewables, and the electrification of most of what is left. Yet this transition has to be accelerated and done effectively. There is little time left for second chances if we are to decarbonize later this century. The Clean Energy Transition will be an indispensable resource for students of energy politics, environmental studies, and public policy, as well as anyone interested in the energy issues of the day.Trade Review“No book better captures both the challenges of dealing with climate change and the promising opportunities for action. Fiorino offers a highly readable, empirically grounded, and comprehensive assessment of actions taken to date and viable paths toward a carbon-neutral energy future.”Michael Kraft, University of Wisconsin, Green Bay“A sober assessment of both the promise of, and potential barriers to, clean energy as the solution to the climate crisis. The Clean Energy Transition is particularly strong in revealing the interplay of technical possibilities and political realities.”Stephen Harper, Intel Corporation“The book provides the serious student in energy policy a fresh look at recent challenges—both from a technology perspective and a policy perspective.”Daniel S. Zachary, Johns Hopkins UniversityTable of Contents:List of Figures, Tables, and Boxes Preface Chapter 1: The Energy Landscape Chapter 2: Why Clean Energy Matters Chapter 3: Getting the Carbon Out: Pathways to Decarbonization Chapter 4: The Invisible Resource: Energy Efficiency Chapter 5: Endless Flows: Renewable Energy Chapter 6: Electrify Everything Chapter 7: Hard Choices and an Opportunity: Nuclear, Carbon Capture, and Green Hydrogen Chapter 8: Accelerating the Energy Transition Chapter 9: The Clean Energy Future Glossary Notes Index

    5 in stock

    £18.04

  • Visualizing Google Cloud

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Visualizing Google Cloud

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisEasy-to-follow visual walkthrough of every important part of the Google Cloud Platform The Google Cloud Platform incorporates dozens of specialized services that enable organizations to offload technological needs onto the cloud. From routine IT operations like storage to sophisticated new capabilities including artificial intelligence and machine learning, the Google Cloud Platform offers enterprises the opportunity to scale and grow efficiently. In Visualizing Google Cloud: Illustrated References for Cloud Engineers & Architects, Google Cloud expert Priyanka Vergadia delivers a fully illustrated, visual guide to matching the best Google Cloud Platform services to your own unique use cases. After a brief introduction to the major categories of cloud services offered by Google, the author offers approximately 100 solutions divided into eight categories of services included in Google Cloud Platform: ComputeStorageDatabasesData AnalyticsData Science, Machine Learning and Artificial IntelligenceApplication Development and Modernization with ContainersNetworkingSecurity You'll find richly illustrated flowcharts and decision diagrams with straightforward explanations in each category, making it easy to adopt and adapt Google's cloud services to your use cases. With coverage of the major categories of cloud modelsincluding infrastructure-, containers-, platforms-, functions-, and serverlessand discussions of storage types, databases and Machine Learning choices, Visualizing Google Cloud: Illustrated References for Cloud Engineers & Architects is perfect for every Google Cloud enthusiast, of course. It is for anyone who is planning a cloud migration or new cloud deployment. It is for anyone preparing for cloud certification, and for anyone looking to make the most of Google Cloud. It is for cloud solutions architects, IT decision-makers, and cloud data and ML engineers. In short, this book is for YOU.Table of ContentsAcknowledgments vi About the Author vii Introduction ix Chapter 1: Infrastructure 2 Chapter 2: Storage 30 Chapter 3: Databases 44 Chapter 4: Data Analytics 62 Chapter 5: Application Development and Modernization Opening 98 Chapter 6: Networking 134 Chapter 7: Data Science, Machine Learning, and Artificial Intelligence 168 Chapter 8: Security 206

    15 in stock

    £23.20

  • Project Management Case Studies

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Project Management Case Studies

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface 1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT METHODOLOGIES Lakes Automotive Ferris HealthCare, Inc. Clark Faucet Company Creating a Methodology Honicker Corporation Acquisition Problem Zane Corporation 2 IMPLEMENTATION OF PROJECT MANAGEMENT Kombs Engineering Williams Machine Tool Company The Reluctant Workers Macon, Inc. Cordova Research Group Cortez Plastics The Enterprise Resource Planning Project The Prioritization of Projects Selling Executives on Project Management The New CIO The Invisible Sponsor Tradeoff Decisions (A) Tradeoff Decisions (B) The Project Audit 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT CULTURES Como Tool and Die (A) Como Tool and Die (B) Apache Metals, Inc. Haller Specialty Manufacturing Coronado Communications Radiance International The Executive Director 4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURES Quasar Communications, Inc. Fargo Foods Government Project Management Falls Engineering White Manufacturing Martig Construction Company 5 NEGOTIATING FOR RESOURCES Ducor Chemical American Electronics International The Carlson Project Communication Failures 6 PROJECT ESTIMATING Capital Industries Small Project Cost Estimating at Percy Company Cory Electric Camden Construction Corporation The Estimating Problem The Singapore Software Group (A) The Singapore Software Group (B) The Singapore Software Group (C) The Singapore Software Group (D) To Bid or Not to Bid 7 PROJECT PLANNING Greyson Corporation Teloxy Engineering (A) Teloxy Engineering (B) Payton Corporation Kemko Manufacturing Chance of a Lifetime 8 PROJECT SCHEDULING Crosby Manufacturing Corporation The Scheduling Dilemma 9 PROJECT EXECUTION The Blue Spider Project Corwin Corporation Quantum Telecom The Trophy Project Margo Company Project Overrun The Automated Evaluation Project The Rise, Fall, and Resurrection of Iridium: A Project Management Perspective Health Care Partners, Inc. McRoy Aerospace The Poor Worker The Prima Donna The Team Meeting The Management Control Freak The Skills Inventory Project 10 CONTROLLING PROJECTS The Two-Boss Problem The Bathtub Period Irresponsible Sponsors The Need for Project Management Metrics (A) The Need for Project Management Metrics (B) The Need for Project Management Metrics (C) The Need for Project Management Metrics (D) The Need for Project Management Metrics (E) The Need for Project Management Metrics (F) The Need for Project Management Metrics (G) The Need for Project Management Metrics (H) 11 PROJECT RISK MANAGEMENT The Space Shuttle Challenger Disaster Packer Telecom Luxor Technologies Altex Corporation Acme Corporation The Risk Management Department Sandora 12 CONFLICT MANAGEMENT Facilities Scheduling at Mayer Manufacturing Scheduling the Safety Lab Telestar International The Problem with Priorities 13 MORALITY AND ETHICS The Project Management Lawsuit Managing Crisis Projects Is It Fraud? The Management Reserve Jill’s D 14 MANAGING SCOPE CHANGES Berlin Brandenburg Airport Sierra Telecom 15 WAGE AND SALARY ADMINISTRATION Photolite Corporation (A) Photolite Corporation (B) Photolite Corporation (C) Photolite Corporation (D) First Security Bank of Cleveland Jackson Industries 16 TIME MANAGEMENT Time Management Exercise 17 MANAGING INNOVATION PROJECTS The Government Think Tank LXT International 18 ASSESSING PROJECT MANAGEMENT MATURITY Simone Engineering Company NorthStar Software Company 19 INDUSTRY SPECIFIC: CONSTRUCTION Robert L. Frank Construction Company The Lyle Construction Project 20 INDUSTRY SPECIFIC: DISNEY THEME PARKS Disney (A) Imagineering Project Management Disney (B) Imagineering in Action: The Haunted Mansion Disney (C) Disney Theme Parks and Enterprise Environmental Factors Disney (D) The Globalization of Disney Disney (E) Hong Kong Ocean Park: Competing Against Disney 21 INDUSTRY SPECIFIC: THE OLYMPIC GAMES Olympics (A) Would You Want to Manage Projects for the City Hosting the Olympic Games? Olympics (B) Olympics, Project Management and PMI®’s Code of Ethics and Professional Responsibility Olympics (C) Would You Want to Manage Projects for Feeding the Athletes in the Olympic Village? Olympics (D) Managing Health and Safety Risks for Some of the Olympic Venues 22 INDUSTRY SPECIFIC: COMMERCIAL AIRCRAFT INDUSTRY Boeing 787 Dreamliner Battery Issues Airbus A380 23 INDUSTRY SPECIFIC: AGILE/SCRUM PROJECT MANAGEMENT Agile (A) Understanding Implementation Risks Agile (B) The Agile Project Management Mindset Agile (C) Managing and Reporting Agility

    15 in stock

    £71.95

  • Digital Audio Signal Processing

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Digital Audio Signal Processing

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisDigital Audio Signal Processing The fully revised new edition of the popular textbook, featuring additional MATLAB exercises and new algorithms for processing digital audio signals Digital Audio Signal Processing (DASP) techniques are used in a variety of applications, ranging from audio streaming and computer-generated music to real-time signal processing and virtual sound processing. Digital Audio Signal Processing provides clear and accessible coverage of the fundamental principles and practical applications of digital audio processing and coding. Throughout the book, the authors explain a wide range of basic audio processing techniques and highlight new directions for automatic tuning of different algorithms and discuss state- of-the-art DASP approaches. Now in its third edition, this popular guide is fully updated with the latest signal processing algorithms for audio processing. Entirely new chapters cover nonlinear processing, Machine Learning (MLTable of ContentsPreface for the Third Edition viii Preface for the Second Edition ix Preface for the First Edition x 1 Introduction 1U Zölzer 1.1 Continuous-time Signals and Convolution 1 1.2 Continuous-time Fourier Transform and Laplace Transform 6 1.3 Sampling and Reconstruction 6 1.4 Discrete-time Signals and Convolution 8 1.5 Discrete-time Fourier Transform and Z-Transform 11 1.6 Discrete Fourier Transform 11 1.7 FIR and IIR Filters 12 1.8 Adaptive Filters 18 1.9 Exercises 21 References 23 2 Quantization 25U Zölzer 2.1 Signal Quantization 25 2.1.1 Classical Quantization Model 25 2.1.2 Quantization Theorem 28 2.1.3 Statistics of Quantization Error 34 2.2 Dither 40 2.2.1 Basics 40 2.2.2 Implementation 44 2.2.3 Examples 44 2.3 Spectrum Shaping of Quantization – Noise Shaping 46 2.4 Number Representation 51 2.4.1 Fixed-point Number Representation 52 2.4.2 Floating-point Number Representation 57 2.4.3 Effects on Format Conversion and Algorithms 60 2.5 JS Applet – Quantization, Dither, and Noise Shaping 62 2.6 Exercises 64 References 65 3 Sampling Rate Conversion 67U Zölzer 3.1 Basics 67 3.1.1 Upsampling and Anti-Imaging Filtering 68 3.1.2 Downsampling and Antialiasing Filtering 69 3.2 Synchronous Conversion 70 3.3 Asynchronous Conversion 74 3.3.1 Single-stage Methods 76 3.3.2 Multistage Methods 78 3.3.3 Control of Interpolation Filters 80 3.4 Interpolation Methods 83 3.4.1 Polynomial Interpolation 83 3.4.2 Lagrange Interpolation 85 3.4.3 Spline Interpolation 87 3.5 Exercises 94 References 95 4 AD/DA Conversion 97U Zölzer 4.1 Methods 97 4.1.1 Nyquist Sampling 97 4.1.2 Oversampling 98 4.1.3 Delta-sigma Modulation 100 4.2 AD Converters 113 4.2.1 Specifications 113 4.2.2 Parallel Converter 116 4.2.3 Successive Approximation 117 4.2.4 Counter Methods 118 4.2.5 Delta-sigma AD Converter 120 4.3 DA Converters 120 4.3.1 Specifications 121 4.3.2 Switched Voltage and Current Sources 123 4.3.3 Weighted Resistors and Capacitors 124 4.3.4 R–2R Resistor Networks 126 4.3.5 Delta-sigma DA Converter 127 4.4 JS Applet – Oversampling and Quantization 127 4.5 Exercises 129 References 130 5 Audio Processing Systems 131U Zölzer and D Ahlers 5.1 Digital Signal Processors 132 5.1.1 Fixed-point DSPs 132 5.1.2 Floating-point DSPs 133 5.2 Digital Audio Interfaces 133 5.2.1 Two-channel AES/EBU Interface 134 5.2.2 MADI Interface 135 5.2.3 Audio in HDMI 139 5.2.4 Audio Computer Interfaces 140 5.2.5 Audio Network Interfaces 141 5.3 Two-channel Systems 146 5.4 Multi-channel Systems 146 References 147 6 Equalizers 149U Zölzer 6.1 Basics 149 6.2 Recursive Audio Filters 153 6.2.1 Design 153 6.2.2 Parametric Filter Structures 162 6.2.3 Quantization Effects 172 6.3 Non-recursive Audio Filters 190 6.3.1 Basics of Fast Convolution 191 6.3.2 Fast Convolution of Long Sequences 194 6.3.3 Filter Design by Frequency Sampling 201 6.4 Multi-complementary Filter Bank 202 6.4.1 Principles 203 6.4.2 Example: Eight-band Multi-complementary Filter Bank 208 6.5 Delay-based Audio Effects 214 6.6 JS Applet – Audio Filters 215 6.7 Exercises 217 References 220 7 Room Simulation 225U Zölzer, P Nowak, and P Bhattacharya 7.1 Basics 225 7.1.1 Room Acoustics 225 7.1.2 Model-based Room Impulse Responses 227 7.1.3 Measurement of Room Impulse Responses 230 7.1.4 Simulation of Room Impulse Responses 234 7.2 Early Reflections 235 7.2.1 Ando’s Investigations 235 7.2.2 Gerzon Algorithm 236 7.3 Subsequent Reverberation 241 7.3.1 Schroeder Algorithm 241 7.3.2 General Feedback Systems 249 7.3.3 Feedback Allpass Systems 252 7.4 Approximation of Room Impulse Responses 256 7.5 JS Applet – Fast Convolution 258 7.6 Exercises 259 References 260 8 Dynamic Range Control 265U Zölzer and E Gerat 8.1 Basics 265 8.2 Static Curve 266 8.3 Dynamic Behavior 269 8.3.1 Level Measurement 269 8.3.2 Gain Factor Smoothing 272 8.3.3 Time Constants 272 8.4 Implementation 273 8.4.1 Limiter 273 8.4.2 Compressor 274 8.4.3 Compressor, Expander, Noise Gate 276 8.4.4 Combination System 276 8.5 Realization Aspects 278 8.5.1 Sampling Rate Reduction 278 8.5.2 Curve Approximation 279 8.5.3 Stereo Processing 280 8.6 Multiband DRC 280 8.7 Dynamic Equalizers 281 8.8 Source-filter DRC 283 8.8.1 Introduction 283 8.8.2 Combination with DRC 284 8.8.3 Applications 284 8.9 JS Applet – Dynamic Range Control 287 8.10 Exercises 288 References 289 9 Audio Coding 291U Zölzer and P Bhattacharya 9.1 Lossless Audio Coding 291 9.2 Lossy Audio Coding 293 9.3 Psychoacoustics 295 9.3.1 Critical Bands and Absolute Threshold 295 9.3.2 Masking 297 9.4 ISO-MPEG1 Audio Coding 303 9.4.1 Filter Banks 303 9.4.2 Psychoacoustic Models 305 9.4.3 Dynamic Bit Allocation and Coding 309 9.5 MPEG-2 Audio Coding 310 9.6 MPEG-2 Advanced Audio Coding 310 9.7 MPEG-4 Audio Coding 321 9.8 Spectral Band Replication 325 9.9 Constrained Energy Lapped Transform – Gain and Shape Coding 327 9.9.1 Gain Quantization 329 9.9.2 Shape Quantization 330 9.9.3 Range Coding 331 9.9.4 CELT Decoding 332 9.10 JS Applet – Psychoacoustics 333 9.11 Exercises 333 References 334 10 Nonlinear Processing 341M Holters and L Köper 10.1 Fundamentals 341 10.2 Overdrive, Distortion, Clipping 343 10.3 Nonlinear Filters 347 10.4 Aliasing and its Mitigation 350 10.5 Virtual Analog Modeling 354 10.5.1 Wave Digital Filters 355 10.5.2 State-space Approaches 359 10.6 Exercises 363 References 364 11 Machine Learning for Audio 367P Bhattacharya, P Nowak, and U Zölzer 11.1 Introduction 367 11.2 Unsupervised and Supervised Learning 368 11.3 Gradient Descent and Backpropagation 369 11.3.1 Feedforward Artificial Neural Network 369 11.3.2 Convolutional Neural Network 373 11.4 Applications 375 11.4.1 Parametric Filter Adaptation 375 11.4.2 Room Simulation 383 11.4.3 Audio Denoising 388 11.5 Exercises 394 References 394 Index 401

    15 in stock

    £103.46

  • FPGA Prototyping by SystemVerilog Examples

    John Wiley & Sons Inc FPGA Prototyping by SystemVerilog Examples

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisA hands-on introduction to FPGA prototyping and SoC design This is the successor edition of the popular FPGA Prototyping by Verilog Examples text. It follows the same learning-by-doing approach to teach the fundamentals and practices of HDL synthesis and FPGA prototyping. The new edition uses a coherent series of examples to demonstrate the process to develop sophisticated digital circuits and IP (intellectual property) cores, integrate them into an SoC (system on a chip) framework, realize the system on an FPGA prototyping board, and verify the hardware and software operation. The examples start with simple gate-level circuits, progress gradually through the RT (register transfer) level modules, and lead to a functional embedded system with custom I/O peripherals and hardware accelerators. Although it is an introductory text, the examples are developed in a rigorous manner, and the derivations follow the strict design guidelines and coding practices used for laTable of ContentsPreface xxvii Acknowledgments xxxiii PART I BASIC DIGITAL CIRCUITS DEVELOPMENT 1 Gate-Level Combinational Circuit 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Brief history of Verilog and SystemVerilog 1 1.1.2 Book coverage 2 1.2 General description 3 1.3 Basic lexical elements and data types 4 1.3.1 Lexical elements 4 1.3.2 Data types used in the book 5 1.3.3 Number representation 6 1.3.4 Operators 7 1.4 Program skeleton 7 1.4.1 Port declaration 7 1.4.2 Signal declaration 8 1.4.3 Program body 8 1.4.4 Concurrent semantics 9 1.4.5 Another example 10 1.5 Structural description 10 1.6 Top-level signal mapping 13 1.7 Testbench 14 1.8 Bibliographic notes 16 1.9 Suggested experiments 16 1.9.1 Code for gate-level greater-than circuit 17 1.9.2 Code for gate-level binary decoder 17 2 Overview of FPGA and EDA Software 19 2.1 FPGA 19 2.1.1 Overview of a general FPGA device 19 2.1.2 Overview of the Xilinx Artix-7 devices 20 2.2 Overview of the Digilent Nexys 4 DDR board 21 2.3 Development flow 22 2.4 Xilinx Vivado Design Suite 24 2.5 Bibliographic notes 24 2.6 Suggested experiments 24 2.6.1 Gate-level greater-than circuit 24 2.6.2 Gate-level binary decoder 26 3 RT-Level Combinational Circuit 29 3.1 Operators 29 3.1.1 Arithmetic operators 31 3.1.2 Shift operators 31 3.1.3 Relational and equality operators 32 3.1.4 Bitwise, reduction, and logical operators 32 3.1.5 Concatenation and replication operators 33 3.1.6 Conditional operators 34 3.1.7 Operator precedence 35 3.1.8 Expression bit-length adjustment 35 3.1.9 Synthesis of z and x values 36 3.2 Always block for a combinational circuit 38 3.2.1 Overview of always block 39 3.2.2 Procedural assignment 40 3.2.3 Conceptual examples 40 3.3 Coding guidelines 43 3.4 If statement 43 3.4.1 Syntax 43 3.4.2 Examples 44 3.5 Case statement 45 3.5.1 Syntax 45 3.5.2 Examples 46 3.5.3 The casez and casex statements 47 3.5.4 Full case and parallel case 48 3.6 Routing structure of conditional control constructs 49 3.6.1 Priority routing network 49 3.6.2 Multiplexing network 51 3.7 Additional coding guidelines for an always block 52 3.7.1 Common errors in combinational circuit codes 52 3.7.2 Guidelines 56 3.8 Parameter and constant 56 3.8.1 Constant 56 3.8.2 Parameter 58 3.9 Replicated structure 59 3.9.1 Generate-for statement 59 3.9.2 Procedural-for statement 60 3.9.3 Example 60 3.10 Design examples 62 3.10.1 Hexadecimal digit to seven-segment LED decoder 62 3.10.2 Sign-magnitude adder 65 3.10.3 Barrel shifter 68 3.10.4 Simplified floating-point adder 69 3.11 Bibliographic notes 73 3.12 Suggested experiments 73 3.12.1 Multi-function barrel shifter 73 3.12.2 Parameterized barrel shifter 74 3.12.3 Dual-priority encoder 74 3.12.4 BCD incrementor 74 3.12.5 Floating-point greater-than circuit 74 3.12.6 Floating-point and signed integer conversion circuit 74 3.12.7 Enhanced floating-point adder 75 4 Regular Sequential Circuit 77 4.1 Introduction 77 4.1.1 D FF and register 78 4.1.2 Basic block system 78 4.1.3 Code development 79 4.1.4 Sequential circuit coding guidelines and style 79 4.2 HDL code of the FF and register 80 4.2.1 D FF 80 4.2.2 Register 85 4.3 Simple design examples 85 4.3.1 Shift register 85 4.3.2 Binary counter and variant 87 4.4 Testbench for sequential circuits 89 4.5 Case study 93 4.5.1 LED time-multiplexing circuit 93 4.5.2 Stopwatch 101 4.6 Timing and clocking 104 4.6.1 Timing of FF 104 4.6.2 Maximum operating frequency 104 4.6.3 Clock tree 107 4.6.4 GALS system and CDC 107 4.7 Bibliographic notes 108 4.8 Suggested experiments 108 4.8.1 Programmable square wave generator 108 4.8.2 PWM and LED dimmer 108 4.8.3 Rotating square circuit 109 4.8.4 Heartbeat circuit 109 4.8.5 Rotating LED banner circuit 109 4.8.6 Enhanced stopwatch 110 5 FSM 111 5.1 Introduction 111 5.1.1 Mealy and Moore outputs 112 5.1.2 FSM representation 112 5.2 FSM code development 115 5.2.1 Enumerated data type and state assignment 115 5.2.2 Multi-segment code 116 5.2.3 Two-segment code 117 5.3 Design examples 118 5.3.1 Rising-edge detector 118 5.3.2 Debouncing circuit 123 5.3.3 Testing circuit 126 5.4 Bibliographic notes 128 5.5 Suggested experiments 128 5.5.1 Dual-edge detector 128 5.5.2 Early detection debouncing circuit 128 5.5.3 Parking lot occupancy counter 129 6 FSMD 131 6.1 Introduction 131 6.1.1 Single RT operation 132 6.1.2 ASMD chart 132 6.1.3 Decision box with a register 134 6.2 Code development of an FSMD 137 6.2.1 Debouncing circuit based on RT methodology 137 6.2.2 Code with explicit data path components 137 6.2.3 Code with implicit data path components 140 6.2.4 Comparison 142 6.3 Design examples 144 6.3.1 Fibonacci number circuit 144 6.3.2 Division circuit 147 6.3.3 Binary-to-BCD conversion circuit 150 6.3.4 Period counter 153 6.3.5 Accurate low-frequency counter 156 6.4 Bibliographic notes 159 6.5 Suggested experiments 159 6.5.1 Early detection debouncing circuit 159 6.5.2 BCD-to-binary conversion circuit 160 6.5.3 Fibonacci circuit with BCD I/O: design approach 1 160 6.5.4 Fibonacci circuit with BCD I/O: design approach 2 160 6.5.5 Auto-scaled low-frequency counter 161 6.5.6 Reaction timer 161 6.5.7 Babbage difference engine emulation circuit 162 7 RAM and Buffer of FPGA 165 7.1 Embedded memory of FPGA device 165 7.1.1 Memory of an Artix device 166 7.1.2 Memory available in the Nexys 4 DDR board 166 7.2 General description for a RAM-like component 167 7.2.1 Register file 167 7.2.2 Dynamic array indexing operation 169 7.2.3 Key aspects of a RAM module 170 7.2.4 Genuine ROM 171 7.3 FIFO buffer 173 7.3.1 FIFO read configuration 174 7.3.2 Circular queue implementation 175 7.4 HDL templates for memory inference 178 7.4.1 Methods to incorporate memory modules 178 7.4.2 Synchronous dual-port RAM 179 7.4.3 “Simple” synchronous dual-port RAM 180 7.4.4 Synchronous single-port RAM 181 7.4.5 Synchronous ROM 182 7.4.6 BRAM-based FIFO buffer 183 7.4.7 Design considerations 183 7.5 Overview of memory controller 184 7.6 Bibliographic notes 185 7.7 Suggested experiments 186 7.7.1 ROM-based sign-magnitude adder 186 7.7.2 ROM-based temperature conversion 186 7.7.3 FIFO with data width conversion 186 7.7.4 Standard FIFO to FWFT FIFO conversion circuit 187 7.7.5 FIFO buffer with extended status 187 7.7.6 Stack 187 8 Selected Topics of SystemVerilog 189 8.1 Timing model 189 8.1.1 Concurrent constructs 190 8.1.2 Assignment statement 190 8.1.3 Basic model 190 8.1.4 Blocking versus nonblocking assignment 192 8.2 Coding guidelines revisited 194 8.2.1 “Single variable assignment” guideline 195 8.2.2 “Blocking assignment for combinational circuit” guideline 195 8.2.3 “Nonblocking assignment for register” guideline 197 8.3 Alternative coding style 198 8.3.1 First coding style revisited 198 8.3.2 Sequential circuit with mixed blocking and nonblocking assignments 199 8.3.3 Combined coding style 201 8.3.4 Summary 206 8.4 Data types 206 8.4.1 The net and variable types 206 8.4.2 The logic data type 207 8.4.3 Limitation of the logic data type 208 8.4.4 New data types in SystemVerilog 208 8.5 Use of the signed data type 209 8.5.1 Overview 209 8.5.2 Signed number conversion 210 8.6 Bibliographic notes 211 8.7 Suggested experiments 211 8.7.1 Shift register with blocking and nonblocking assignments 211 8.7.2 Alternative coding style for the BCD counter 212 8.7.3 Alternative coding style for the FIFO buffer 212 8.7.4 Alternative coding style for the Fibonacci circuit 212 8.7.5 Dual-mode comparator 212 PART II EMBEDDED SOC I: VANILLA FPRO SYSTEM 9 Overview of Embedded SoC Systems 215 9.1 Embedded SoC 215 9.1.1 Overview of embedded systems 215 9.1.2 FPGA-based SoC 216 9.1.3 IP cores 216 9.2 Development flow of the embedded SoC 217 9.2.1 Hardware–software partition 217 9.2.2 Hardware development flow 217 9.2.3 Software development flow 219 9.2.4 Physical implementation and test 219 9.2.5 Custom IP core development 219 9.3 FPro SoC Platform 220 9.3.1 Motivations 220 9.3.2 Platform hardware organization 221 9.3.3 Platform software organization 223 9.3.4 Modified development flow 224 9.4 Adaptation on the Digilent Nexys 4 DDR board 224 9.5 Portability 226 9.5.1 Processor Module and Bridge 226 9.5.2 MMIO subsystem 227 9.5.3 Video subsystem 227 9.6 Organization 228 9.7 Bibliographic notes 228 10 Bare Metal System Software Development 231 10.1 Bare metal system development overview 231 10.1.1 Desktop-like system versus bare metal system 231 10.1.2 Basic embedded program architecture 232 10.2 Memory-mapped I/O 233 10.2.1 Overview 233 10.2.2 Memory alignment 234 10.2.3 I/O register map 234 10.2.4 I/O address space of the FPro system 234 10.3 Direct I/O Register Access 235 10.3.1 Review of C pointer 235 10.3.2 C pointer for I/O register 236 10.4 Robust I/O register access 237 10.4.1 chu_io_map.h and chu_io_map.svh 237 10.4.2 inttypes.h 238 10.4.3 chu_io_rw.h 239 10.5 Techniques for low-level I/O operations 241 10.5.1 Bit manipulation 241 10.5.2 Packing and unpacking 242 10.6 Device Drivers 243 10.6.1 Overview 243 10.6.2 GPO and GPI drivers 243 10.6.3 Timer driver 245 10.6.4 UART driver 247 10.7 FPro utility routines and directory structure 248 10.7.1 Minimal hardware requirements 248 10.7.2 Utility routines 248 10.7.3 Directory structure 251 10.8 Test program 252 10.8.1 IP core verification routine 252 10.8.2 Programming with limited memory 252 10.8.3 Test function integration 252 10.8.4 Test program for the vanilla FPro system 253 10.8.5 Implementation 254 10.9 Bibliographic notes 255 10.10 Suggested experiments 255 10.10.1 Chasing LEDs 255 10.10.2 Collision LEDs 256 10.10.3 Pulse width modulation 256 10.10.4 System time display 256 11 FPro Bus Protocol and MMIO Slot Specification 257 11.1 FPro bus 257 11.1.1 Overview of the bus 257 11.1.2 SoC interconnect 258 11.1.3 FPro bus protocol specification 259 11.2 Interface with the bus 260 11.2.1 Introduction 260 11.2.2 Write interface and decoding 261 11.2.3 Read interface and multiplexing 263 11.2.4 FIFO buffer as an I/O register 264 11.2.5 Timing consideration 265 11.3 MMIO I/O core 266 11.3.1 MMIO slot interface specification 266 11.3.2 Basic MMIO I/O core construction 268 11.3.3 GPO and GPI cores 269 11.4 Timer core development 270 11.4.1 Custom logic 270 11.4.2 Register map 271 11.4.3 Wrapping circuit for the slot interface 271 11.5 MMIO controller 272 11.5.1 chu_io_map.svh file 273 11.5.2 HDL code 273 11.5.3 Vanilla MMIO subsystem 275 11.6 MCS I/O bus and bridge 278 11.6.1 Overview of Xilinx MicroBlaze MCS 278 11.6.2 MicroBlaze MCS I/O bus 278 11.6.3 MCS-to-FPro bridge 279 11.7 Vanilla FPro system construction 281 11.8 Bibliographic notes 282 11.9 Suggested experiments 283 11.9.1 FPro bus with a byte-lane enable signal 283 11.9.2 Seven-segment control with a GPO core 283 11.9.3 GPIO core 283 11.9.4 Blinking-LED core 284 11.9.5 Timer core with a programmable period 284 11.9.6 Timer core with a run-once mode 284 12 UART Core 287 12.1 Introduction 287 12.1.1 Overview of serial communication 287 12.1.2 Overview of the UART 288 12.1.3 Oversampling procedure 288 12.2 UART construction 289 12.2.1 Conceptual design 289 12.2.2 Baud rate generator 290 12.2.3 UART receiver 291 12.2.4 UART transmitter 293 12.2.5 Top-level HDL code 295 12.3 UART core development 296 12.3.1 Register map 296 12.3.2 Wrapping circuit for the slot interface 297 12.4 UART driver 298 12.4.1 Class definition 299 12.4.2 Basic methods 300 12.4.3 ASCII code 301 12.4.4 Display methods 303 12.4.5 Test 305 12.5 Additional project ideas 305 12.5.1 Original serial port 305 12.5.2 Emulated serial port 305 12.5.3 Direct connection 306 12.5.4 USB-to-UART adaptor 306 12.5.5 Wireless adaptor 307 12.6 Bibliographic notes 308 12.7 Suggested experiments 308 12.7.1 UART-controlled chasing LEDs 308 12.7.2 Alternative read configuration 308 12.7.3 UART controller with a parity bit 308 12.7.4 UART core with an error status 309 12.7.5 Configurable UART core 309 12.7.6 UART core with automatic baud rate detection 309 12.7.7 UART core with enhanced automatic baud rate detection 310 12.7.8 UART core with an automatic baud rate and a parity detection circuit 310 PART III EMBEDDED SOC II: BASIC I/O CORES 13 Xilinx XADC Core 313 13.1 Overview of XADC 313 13.1.1 Block diagram 313 13.1.2 Configuration 314 13.2 XADC core development 315 13.2.1 XADC instantiation 315 13.2.2 Basic wrapping circuit design 316 13.2.3 Register map 318 13.2.4 HDL code 318 13.3 XADC core device driver 320 13.3.1 Class definition 320 13.3.2 Class implementation 321 13.3.3 Testing for the XADC core 322 13.4 Sampler FPro system 323 13.4.1 Testing procedure of an FPro core 323 13.4.2 System configuration 323 13.4.3 Hardware derivation 324 13.4.4 Software verification program 331 13.5 Additional project ideas 332 13.6 Bibliographic notes 333 13.7 Suggested experiments 333 13.7.1 Real-time voltage display 333 13.7.2 Potentiometer-controlled chasing LEDs 333 13.7.3 Potentiometer-controlled LED dimmer 333 13.7.4 Enhanced wrapping circuit: part I 333 13.7.5 Enhanced wrapping circuit: part II 333 14 Pulse Width Modulation Core 335 14.1 Introduction 335 14.1.1 PWM as analog output 335 14.1.2 Main characteristics 336 14.2 PWM design 336 14.2.1 Basic design 336 14.2.2 Enhanced design 337 14.3 PWM core development 339 14.3.1 Register map 339 14.3.2 Wrapped PWM circuit 340 14.4 PWM driver 341 14.4.1 Class definition 341 14.4.2 Class implementation 342 14.5 Testing 343 14.6 Project ideas 343 14.7 Suggested experiments 345 14.7.1 Police dash light 345 14.7.2 Rainbow night light 345 14.7.3 Enhanced PWM core: part I 345 14.7.4 Enhanced PWM core: part II 346 14.7.5 Enhanced GPIO core 346 14.7.6 Servo motor driver 346 15 Debouncing Core and LED-Mux Core 347 15.1 Debouncing Core 347 15.1.1 Multi-bit debouncing circuit 347 15.1.2 Register map and the slot wrapping circuit 350 15.1.3 Driver 351 15.1.4 Test 352 15.2 LED-mux core 352 15.2.1 Eight-digit seven-segment LED display multiplexing circuit 352 15.2.2 Register map and the slot wrapping circuit 354 15.2.3 Driver 355 15.2.4 Test 358 15.3 Project ideas 358 15.4 Suggested experiments 360 15.4.1 Area comparison of two debouncing circuits 360 15.4.2 Enhanced debouncing core: part I 360 15.4.3 Enhanced debouncing core: part II 360 15.4.4 Rotating square pattern revisited 360 15.4.5 Heartbeat pattern revisited 360 15.4.6 Stopwatch 360 15.4.7 Enhanced LED-mux core 361 16 SPI Core 363 16.1 Overview 363 16.1.1 Conceptual architecture 364 16.1.2 Multiple-device configuration 364 16.1.3 Basic timing 366 16.1.4 Operation modes 367 16.1.5 Undefined aspects 368 16.2 SPI controller 369 16.2.1 Basic design 369 16.2.2 FSMD construction 370 16.2.3 HDL implementation 370 16.3 SPI core development 374 16.3.1 Register map 374 16.3.2 Wrapping circuit for the slot interface 374 16.4 SPI driver 376 16.4.1 Class definition 376 16.4.2 Class implementation 377 16.5 Test 378 16.5.1 ADXL362 accelerometer 378 16.5.2 Test program 380 16.6 Project ideas 381 16.6.1 SD card 381 16.6.2 TFT LCD module 382 16.7 Bibliographic notes 382 16.8 Suggested experiments 382 16.8.1 Inclination sensing 382 16.8.2 “Tapping” detection 382 16.8.3 ADXL362 C++ class 383 16.8.4 Enhanced SPI controller: part I 383 16.8.5 Enhanced SPI controller: part II 383 16.8.6 “Automatic-read” ADXL362 wrapper: part I 383 16.8.7 “Automatic-read” ADXL362 wrapper: part II 384 16.8.8 Flash memory access 384 16.8.9 SPI slave controller: part I 384 16.8.10 SPI slave controller: part II 385 17 I2C Core 387 17.1 Overview 387 17.1.1 Electrical characteristics 388 17.1.2 Basic bus protocol 388 17.1.3 Basic timing 389 17.1.4 Additional features 390 17.2 I2C controller 391 17.2.1 Basic design 391 17.2.2 Conceptual FSMD construction 391 17.2.3 Output control logic 394 17.2.4 I2C bus clock generation 394 17.2.5 HDL implementation 395 17.3 I2C core development 400 17.3.1 Register map 400 17.3.2 Wrapping circuit for the slot interface 400 17.4 I2C driver 401 17.4.1 Class definition 401 17.4.2 Class implementation 402 17.5 Test 405 17.5.1 ADT7420 temperature sensor 405 17.5.2 Test program 406 17.6 Project idea 406 17.7 Bibliographic notes 407 17.8 Suggested experiments 407 17.8.1 Thermometer 407 17.8.2 ADT7420 C++ class 407 17.8.3 Enhanced I2C core 408 17.8.4 “Automatic-read” ADT7420 wrapper 408 17.8.5 I2C slave controller: part I 408 17.8.6 I2C slave controller: part II 408 18 PS2 Core 409 18.1 Introduction 409 18.1.1 PS2-device-to-host communication protocol and timing 410 18.1.2 Host-to-PS2-device communication protocol and timing 410 18.2 PS2 controller 411 18.2.1 Conceptual design 411 18.2.2 PS2 receiving subsystem 411 18.2.3 PS2 transmitting subsystem 415 18.2.4 Complete PS2 system 419 18.3 PS2 core development 420 18.3.1 Register map 420 18.3.2 Wrapping circuit for the slot interface 421 18.4 PS2 driver 422 18.4.1 Class definition 422 18.4.2 Lower layer methods 422 18.4.3 PS2 initialization routine 423 18.4.4 Keyboard routine 425 18.4.5 Mouse routine 428 18.5 Test 430 18.6 Bibliographic notes 431 18.7 Suggested experiments 431 18.7.1 PS2 receiving subsystem with watchdog timer 431 18.7.2 Keyboard-controlled LED flashing circuit 432 18.7.3 Enhanced keyboard driver routine: part I 432 18.7.4 Enhanced keyboard driver routine: part II 432 18.7.5 Remote-mode mouse driver 432 18.7.6 Scroll-wheel mouse driver 432 19 Sound I: DDFS Core 433 19.1 Introduction 433 19.2 Design and implementation 434 19.2.1 Direct synthesis of a digital waveform 434 19.2.2 Direct synthesis of an unmodulated analog waveform 435 19.2.3 Direct synthesis of a modulated analog waveform 436 19.3 Fixed-point arithmetic 437 19.4 DDFS construction 438 19.5 DAC (digital-to-analog converter) 440 19.5.1 Conceptual design 440 19.5.2 HDL implementation 441 19.6 DDFS core development 442 19.6.1 Register map 442 19.6.2 Wrapping circuit for the slot interface 443 19.7 DDFS driver 444 19.7.1 Class definition 444 19.7.2 Class implementation 445 19.8 Test 447 19.9 Bibliographic notes 448 19.10 Suggested experiments 448 19.10.1 Quadrature phase carrier generation 448 19.10.2 Reduced-size phase-to-amplitude lookup table 448 19.10.3 Additive harmonic synthesis 449 19.10.4 Simple function generator 449 19.10.5 Arbitrary waveform generator 449 19.10.6 Sample-based synthesis 449 20 Sound II: ADSR Core 451 20.1 Introduction 451 20.2 ADSR envelope generator 452 20.2.1 Conceptual FSMD design 453 20.2.2 ASMD chart 453 20.2.3 HDL implementation 455 20.3 ADSR core development 457 20.3.1 Register map 457 20.3.2 Wrapped ADSR circuit 458 20.4 ADSR driver 460 20.4.1 Class definition 460 20.4.2 Configuration methods 461 20.4.3 calc note freq() method 463 20.4.4 play note() method 465 20.5 Test 465 20.6 Project idea 466 20.7 Bibliographic notes 467 20.8 Suggested experiments 467 20.8.1 RTTTL music player 467 20.8.2 ADSR envelope testing 467 20.8.3 Pushbutton piano 467 20.8.4 Keyboard piano 468 20.8.5 Keyboard recorder 468 20.8.6 Real-time mode ADSR generator 468 20.8.7 Real-time mode pushbutton piano 468 20.8.8 Merged DDFS and ADSR core 468 20.8.9 ADSR core with an automatic play FIFO buffer 468 20.8.10 ADSR core for frequency modulation 468 PART IV EMBEDDED SOC III: VIDEO CORES 21 Introduction to the Video System 471 21.1 Introduction to a video display 471 21.1.1 Conceptual video display 471 21.1.2 VGA interface 472 21.2 Stream interface 473 21.2.1 Random-access interface versus stream interface 473 21.2.2 Flow control of the stream interface 473 21.3 VGA synchronization 475 21.3.1 Basic operation of a CRT monitor 475 21.3.2 Horizontal synchronization 476 21.3.3 Vertical synchronization 478 21.3.4 Pixel clock rate 479 21.3.5 VGA synchronization circuit 480 21.4 Bar test-pattern generator 483 21.5 Color-to-grayscale conversion circuit 485 21.6 Demo video system 486 21.7 Advanced video standards 488 21.8 Bibliographic notes 489 21.9 Suggested experiments 489 21.9.1 Horizontal bar test-pattern generator 489 21.9.2 Color channel selection circuit 489 21.9.3 Enhanced color-to-grayscale conversion circuit 489 21.9.4 Square test-pattern generator: part I 489 21.9.5 Square test-pattern generator: part II 489 21.9.6 Square test-pattern generator: part III 490 21.9.7 Square test-pattern generator: part IV 490 22 FPro Video Subsystem 491 22.1 Organization of the video subsystem 491 22.1.1 Overview 491 22.1.2 Video controller 493 22.1.3 HDL of the video controller 494 22.2 FPro video IP core 495 22.2.1 Basic functionality 495 22.2.2 Blending operation 496 22.2.3 Core architecture 498 22.2.4 Alternative core partition 500 22.3 Example video cores 500 22.3.1 Bar test-pattern generator core 500 22.3.2 Color-to-grayscale conversion core 503 22.3.3 “Dummy” core 504 22.4 FPro video synchronization core 504 22.4.1 Line buffer 505 22.4.2 Enhanced video synchronization circuit 508 22.4.3 HDL code 511 22.5 Daisy video subsystem 512 22.5.1 Subsystem overview 512 22.5.2 Interface to the video synchronization core 513 22.5.3 HDL code 513 22.5.4 Timing and performance considerations 517 22.6 Vanilla daisy FPro system 517 22.6.1 Clock management core 518 22.6.2 Updated chu_io_map.svh 519 22.6.3 HDL code 519 22.7 Video driver and test program 521 22.7.1 Updated chu_io_map.h and chu_io_rw.h files 521 22.7.2 GPV core driver 522 22.7.3 Test program 523 22.8 Bibliographic notes 524 22.9 Suggested experiments 525 22.9.1 Color channel selection core 525 22.9.2 Enhanced color-to-grayscale conversion core 525 22.9.3 Square test-pattern generator core 525 22.9.4 Alpha blending circuit 525 22.9.5 “Highlight” core 525 22.9.6 SVGA synchronization core 526 22.9.7 Configurable video synchronization core 526 22.9.8 Pipelined video subsystem 526 23 Sprite Core 527 23.1 Introduction 527 23.2 Basic design 528 23.2.1 Sprite RAM 528 23.2.2 In-region comparison circuit 529 23.3 Mouse pointer core 530 23.3.1 Pointer sprite RAM 530 23.3.2 Pixel generation circuit 531 23.3.3 Top-level design 532 23.4 “Ghost” character core 534 23.4.1 Multiple images and animation 534 23.4.2 Overview of the palette scheme 535 23.4.3 Ghost sprite RAM and the palette circuit 535 23.4.4 Animation timing circuit 537 23.4.5 Pixel generation circuit 537 23.4.6 Top-level design 540 23.5 Sprite core driver and test program 541 23.5.1 Sprite core driver 541 23.5.2 Test program 543 23.6 Bibliographic notes 544 23.7 Suggested experiments 544 23.7.1 Mouse pointer control with PS2 core 544 23.7.2 Emulated ghost core 544 23.7.3 Palette circuit for the mouse pointer sprite 544 23.7.4 Sprite scaling circuit 544 23.7.5 Portrait mode display 545 23.7.6 Multiple-object generation 545 23.7.7 Animation speed control 545 23.7.8 Imitated blinking LED: part I 545 23.7.9 Imitated blinking LED: part II 545 23.7.10 Imitated blinking LED: part III 546 24 On-Screen-Display Core 547 24.1 Introduction to tile graphics 547 24.2 Basic OSD design 549 24.2.1 Text-mode display 549 24.2.2 Font ROM 550 24.2.3 Tile RAM 550 24.2.4 Basic organization 551 24.3 OSD core 552 24.3.1 Font ROM 552 24.3.2 Pixel generation circuit 553 24.3.3 Top-level design 555 24.4 OSD core driver and test program 557 24.4.1 OSD core driver 557 24.4.2 Testing program 558 24.5 Bibliographic notes 559 24.6 Suggested experiments 559 24.6.1 Rotating banner 559 24.6.2 Text console 559 24.6.3 Underline for the cursor 559 24.6.4 Portrait-mode display 560 24.6.5 Font scaling circuit: part I 560 24.6.6 Font scaling circuit: part II 560 24.6.7 Extended font 560 24.6.8 Tile-based ghost core 560 25 VGA Frame Buffer Core 561 25.1 Overview 561 25.2 Frame buffer core 562 25.2.1 FPGA memory consideration 562 25.2.2 Video memory module 562 25.2.3 Address translation 563 25.2.4 Pixel generation circuit 564 25.2.5 Register map 566 25.2.6 Top-level HDL code 566 25.3 Driver and test program 567 25.3.1 Frame buffer core driver 567 25.3.2 Geometrical modeling 568 25.3.3 Test program 570 25.4 Project ideas 570 25.5 Bibliographic notes 572 25.6 Suggested experiments 572 25.6.1 Virtual prototyping board panel 572 25.6.2 Virtual analog wall clock 572 25.6.3 Geometrical model functions 572 25.6.4 Simulated “Etch a Sketch” toy 572 25.6.5 Frame buffer core with 3-bit color depth 573 25.6.6 Frame buffer core with 1-bit color depth 573 25.6.7 QVGA frame buffer core 573 25.6.8 Line drawing hardware accelerator 573 25.6.9 Bidirectional frame buffer access: part I 573 25.6.10 Bidirectional frame buffer access: part II 573 PART V EPILOGUE 26 What’s Next 577 References 581 Appendix A: Tutorials 585 A.1 Overview of Xilinx Vivado IDE 585 A.2 Short tutorial on Vivado hardware development 589 A.2.1 Create a design project 590 A.2.2 Add or create Xilinx IP core instances 591 A.2.3 Add or create HDL design files 591 A.2.4 Add a constraint file 592 A.2.5 Perform synthesis, implementation, and bitstream generation 593 A.2.6 Program an FPGA device 593 A.3 Short tutorial on Vivado simulation 594 A.3.1 Add or create HDL testbench 596 A.3.2 Perform initial simulation 596 A.3.3 Customize waveform display 597 A.4 Tutorial on IP instantiation 597 A.4.1 Dual-clock FIFO core via HDL templates 598 A.4.2 IP Catalog utility 599 A.4.3 Generate a MicroBlaze MCS component 600 A.4.4 XADC IP core 601 A.4.5 Clock management IP core 602 A.5 Short tutorial on FPro system development 604 A.5.1 Derive FPro system hardware 605 A.5.2 Export hardware configuration 605 A.5.3 Derive software 605 A.5.4 Embed elf file into FPGA’s memory module and regenerate bitstream 608 A.5.5 Set up the terminal emulator program 610 A.5.6 Program an FPGA device 610 A.6 Bibliographic notes 611 Topic Index 613

    15 in stock

    £80.96

  • Handbook of Microwave Component Measurements

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Handbook of Microwave Component Measurements

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisHandbook of Microwave Component Measurements Second Edition is a fully updated, complete reference to this topic, focusing on the modern measurement tools, such as a Vector Network Analyzer (VNA), gathering in one place all the concepts, formulas, and best practices of measurement science. It includes basic concepts in each chapter as well as appendices which provide all the detail needed to understand the science behind microwave measurements. The book offers an insight into the best practices for ascertaining the true nature of the device-under-test (DUT), optimizing the time to setup and measure, and to the greatest extent possible, remove the effects of the measuring equipment from that result. Furthermore, the author writes with a simplicity that is easily accessible to the student or new engineer, yet is thorough enough to provide details of measurement science for even the most advanced applications and researchers. This welcome new edition brings forward the most modeTable of ContentsForeword to the Second Edition xvii Foreword to the First Edition xix Preface to the Second Edition xxi Preface to the First Edition xxiii Acknowledgments for the Second Edition xxv Acknowledgments from the First Edition xxvii 1 Introduction to Microwave Measurements 1 1.1 Modern Measurement Process 2 1.2 A Practical Measurement Focus 3 1.3 Definition of Microwave Parameters 3 1.3.1 S-Parameter Primer 4 1.3.2 Phase Response of Networks 11 1.4 Power Parameters 13 1.4.1 Incident and Reflected Power 13 1.4.2 Available Power 13 1.4.3 Delivered Power 14 1.4.4 Power Available from a Network 14 1.4.5 Available Gain 15 1.5 Noise Figure and Noise Parameters 15 1.5.1 Noise Temperature 16 1.5.2 Effective or Excess Input Noise Temperature 17 1.5.3 Excess Noise Power and Operating Temperature 17 1.5.4 Noise Power Density 17 1.5.5 Noise Parameters 18 1.6 Distortion Parameters 19 1.6.1 Harmonics 19 1.6.2 Second-Order Intercept 19 1.6.3 Two-Tone Intermodulation Distortion 20 1.6.4 Adjacent Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Level Ratio 23 1.6.5 Noise Power Ratio (NPR) 24 1.6.6 Error Vector Magnitude (EVM) 25 1.7 Characteristics of Microwave Components 26 1.8 Passive Microwave Components 27 1.8.1 Cables, Connectors, and Transmission Lines 27 1.8.2 Connectors 31 1.8.3 Non-coaxial Transmission Lines 44 1.9 Filters 47 1.10 Directional Couplers 49 1.11 Circulators and Isolators 51 1.12 Antennas 52 1.13 PC Board Components 53 1.13.1 SMT Resistors 53 1.13.2 SMT Capacitors 56 1.13.3 SMT Inductors 57 1.13.4 PC Board Vias 57 1.14 Active Microwave Components 58 1.14.1 Linear and Non-linear 58 1.14.2 Amplifiers: System, Low-Noise, High Power 58 1.14.3 Mixers and Frequency Converters 59 1.14.4 Frequency Multiplier and Limiters and Dividers 61 1.14.5 Oscillators 62 1.15 Measurement Instrumentation 63 1.15.1 Power Meters 63 1.15.2 Signal Sources 64 1.15.3 Spectrum Analyzers 65 1.15.4 Vector Signal Analyzers 66 1.15.5 Noise Figure Analyzers 67 1.15.6 Network Analyzers 67 References 70 2 VNA Measurement Systems 71 2.1 Introduction 71 2.2 VNA Block Diagrams 72 2.2.1 VNA Source 73 2.2.2 Understanding Source-Match 76 2.2.3 VNA Test Set 82 2.2.4 Directional Devices 85 2.2.5 VNA Receivers 91 2.2.6 IF and Data Processing 95 2.2.7 Multiport VNAs 97 2.2.8 High-Power Test Systems 104 2.2.9 VNA with mm-Wave Extenders 105 2.3 VNA Measurement of Linear Microwave Parameters 107 2.3.1 Measurement Limitations of the VNA 107 2.3.2 Limitations Due to External Components 111 2.4 Measurements Derived from S-Parameters 112 2.4.1 The Smith Chart 112 2.4.2 Transforming S-Parameters to Other Impedances 117 2.4.3 Concatenating Circuits and T-Parameters 118 2.5 Modeling Circuits Using Y and Z Conversion 120 2.5.1 Reflection Conversion 120 2.5.2 Transmission Conversion 120 2.6 Other Linear Parameters 121 2.6.1 Z-Parameters, or Open-Circuit Impedance Parameters 122 2.6.2 Y-Parameters, or Short-Circuit Admittance Parameters 123 2.6.3 ABCD Parameters 124 2.6.4 H-Parameters or Hybrid Parameters 125 2.6.5 Complex Conversions and Non-equal Reference Impedances 126 References 126 3 Calibration and Vector Error Correction 127 3.1 Introduction 127 3.1.1 Error Correction and Linear Measurement Methods for S-Parameters 128 3.1.2 Power Measurements with a VNA 131 3.2 Basic Error Correction for S-Parameters: Cal-Application 134 3.2.1 12-Term Error Model 134 3.2.2 1-Port Error Model 136 3.2.3 8-Term Error Model 136 3.3 Determining Error Terms: Cal-Acquisition for 12-Term Models 139 3.3.1 1-Port Error Terms 139 3.3.2 1-Port Standards 141 3.3.3 2-Port Error Terms 148 3.3.4 12-Term to 11-Term Error Model 153 3.4 Determining Error Terms: Cal-Acquisition for 8-Term Models 153 3.4.1 TRL Standards and Raw Measurements 153 3.4.2 Special Cases for TRL Calibration 157 3.4.3 Unknown Thru or SOLR (Reciprocal Thru Calibration) 158 3.4.4 Applications of Unknown Thru Calibrations 159 3.4.5 QSOLT Calibration 161 3.4.6 Electronic Calibration (ECal™) or Automatic Calibration 162 3.5 Waveguide Calibrations 166 3.6 Calibration for Source Power 167 3.6.1 Calibrating Source Power for Source Frequency Response 168 3.6.2 Calibration for Power Sensor Mismatch 169 3.6.3 Calibration for Source Power Linearity 171 3.7 Calibration for Receiver Power 173 3.7.1 Some Historical Perspective 173 3.7.2 Modern Receiver Power Calibration 173 3.7.3 Response Correction for the Transmission Test Receiver 178 3.7.4 Power Waves vs. Actual Waves 181 3.8 Calibrating Multiple Channels Simultaneously: Cal All 182 3.9 Multiport Calibration Strategies 186 3.9.1 N × 2-Port Calibrations: Switching Test Sets 186 3.9.2 N-port Calibration: True Multiport 188 3.10 Automatic In-Situ Calibrations: CalPod 191 3.10.1 CalPod Initialization and Recorrection 192 3.10.2 CalPod-as-Ecal 194 3.11 Devolved Calibrations 194 3.11.1 Response Calibrations 195 3.11.2 Enhanced Response Calibration 196 3.12 Determining Residual Errors 199 3.12.1 Reflection Errors 199 3.12.2 Using Airlines to Determine Residual Errors 199 3.13 Computing Measurement Uncertainties 210 3.13.1 Uncertainty in Reflection Measurements 210 3.13.2 Uncertainty in Source Power 211 3.13.3 Uncertainty in Measuring Power (Receiver Uncertainty) 212 3.14 S21 or Transmission Uncertainty 212 3.14.1 General Uncertainty Equation for S21 214 3.14.2 Dynamic Uncertainty Computation 215 3.15 Errors in Phase 218 3.16 Practical Calibration Limitations 219 3.16.1 Cable Flexure 220 3.16.2 Changing Power after Calibration 221 3.16.3 Compensating for Changes in Step Attenuators 223 3.16.4 Connector Repeatability 225 3.16.5 Noise Effects 226 3.16.6 Drift: Short-Term and Long-Term 227 3.16.7 Interpolation of Error Terms 229 3.16.8 Calibration Quality: Electronic vs. Mechanical Kits 231 Reference 232 4 Time-Domain Transforms 235 4.1 Introduction 235 4.2 The Fourier Transform 236 4.2.1 The Continuous Fourier Transform 236 4.2.2 Even and Odd Functions and the Fourier Transform 236 4.2.3 Modulation (Shift) Theorem 237 4.3 The Discrete Fourier Transform 238 4.3.1 Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) and Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) 238 4.3.2 Discrete Fourier Transforms 240 4.4 Fourier Transform (Analytic) vs. VNA Time Domain Transform 240 4.4.1 Defining the Fourier Transform 241 4.4.2 Effects of Discrete Sampling 242 4.4.3 Effects of Truncated Frequency 244 4.4.4 Windowing to Reduce Effects of Truncation 246 4.4.5 Scaling and Renormalization 248 4.5 Low-Pass Transforms 248 4.5.1 Low-Pass Impulse Mode 248 4.5.2 DC Extrapolation 249 4.5.3 Low-Pass Step Mode 249 4.5.4 Band-Pass Mode 251 4.6 Time-Domain Gating 252 4.6.1 Gating Loss and Renormalization 253 4.7 Examples of Time-Domain Transforms of Various Networks 256 4.7.1 Time-Domain Response of Changes in Line Impedance 256 4.7.2 Time-Domain Response of Discrete Discontinuities 257 4.7.3 Time-Domain Responses of Various Circuits 257 4.8 The Effects of Masking and Gating on Measurement Accuracy 259 4.8.1 Compensation for Changes in Line Impedance 259 4.8.2 Compensation for Discrete Discontinuities 260 4.8.3 Time-Domain Gating 260 4.8.4 Estimating an Uncertainty Due to Masking 265 4.9 Time-Domain Transmission Using VNA 265 4.10 Conclusions 269 References 269 5 Measuring Linear Passive Devices 271 5.1 Transmission Lines, Cables, and Connectors 271 5.1.1 Calibration for Low Loss Devices with Connectors 271 5.1.2 Measuring Electrically Long Devices 273 5.1.3 Attenuation Measurements 278 5.1.4 Return Loss Measurements 295 5.1.5 Cable Length and Delay 305 5.2 Filters and Filter Measurements 306 5.2.1 Filter Classes and Difficulties 306 5.2.2 Duplexer and Diplexers 307 5.2.3 Measuring Tunable High-Performance Filters 308 5.2.4 Measuring Transmission Response 310 5.2.5 High Speed vs. Dynamic Range 315 5.2.6 Extremely High Dynamic Range Measurements 317 5.2.7 Calibration Considerations 326 5.3 Multiport Devices 327 5.3.1 Differential Cables and Lines 328 5.3.2 Couplers 328 5.3.3 Hybrids, Splitters, and Dividers 331 5.3.4 Circulators and Isolators 334 5.4 Resonators 336 5.4.1 Resonator Responses on a Smith Chart 336 5.5 Antenna Measurements 338 5.6 Conclusions 340 References 341 6 Measuring Amplifiers 343 6.1 Amplifiers as a Linear Devices 343 6.1.1 Pretesting an Amplifier 344 6.1.2 Optimizing VNA Settings for Calibration 346 6.1.3 Calibration for Amplifier Measurements 347 6.1.4 Amplifier Measurements 351 6.1.5 Analysis of Amplifier Measurements 357 6.1.6 Saving Amplifier Measurement Results 367 6.2 Gain Compression Measurements 372 6.2.1 Compression Definitions 372 6.2.2 AM-to-PM or Phase Compression 376 6.2.3 Swept Frequency Gain and Phase Compression 377 6.2.4 Gain Compression Application, Smart Sweep, and Safe-Sweep Mode 378 6.3 Measuring High-Gain Amplifiers 384 6.3.1 Setup for High-Gain Amplifiers 386 6.3.2 Calibration Considerations 386 6.4 Measuring High-Power Amplifiers 389 6.4.1 Configurations for Generating High Drive Power 389 6.4.2 Configurations for Receiving High-Power 391 6.4.3 Power Calibration and Pre/Post Leveling 393 6.5 Making Pulsed-RF Measurements 394 6.5.1 Wideband vs. Narrowband Measurements 395 6.5.2 Pulse Profile Measurements 398 6.5.3 Pulse-to-Pulse Measurements 401 6.5.4 DC Measurements for Pulsed RF Stimulus 401 6.6 Distortion Measurements 403 6.6.1 Harmonic Measurements on Amplifiers 404 6.7 Measuring Doherty Amplifiers 410 6.8 X-Parameters, Load-Pull Measurements, Active Loads, and Hot S-Parameters 413 6.8.1 Non-linear Responses and X-Parameters 414 6.8.2 Load-Pull, Source-Pull, and Load Contours 417 6.8.3 Hot S-Parameters and True Hot-S22 421 6.9 Conclusions on Amplifier Measurements 433 References 434 7 Mixer and Frequency Converter Measurements 435 7.1 Mixer Characteristics 435 7.1.1 Small Signal Model of Mixers 438 7.1.2 Reciprocity in Mixers 442 7.1.3 Scalar and Vector Responses 444 7.2 Mixers vs. Frequency Converters 445 7.2.1 Frequency Converter Design 446 7.2.2 Multiple Conversions and Spur Avoidance 446 7.3 Mixers as a 12-Port Device 448 7.3.1 Mixer Conversion Terms 448 7.4 Mixer Measurements: Frequency Response 451 7.4.1 Introduction 451 7.4.2 Amplitude Response 452 7.4.3 Phase Response 456 7.4.4 Group Delay and Modulation Methods 466 7.4.5 Swept LO Measurements 469 7.5 Calibration for Mixer Measurements 476 7.5.1 Calibrating for Power 476 7.5.2 Calibrating for Phase 479 7.5.3 Determining the Phase and Delay of a Reciprocal Calibration Mixer 482 7.6 Mixers Measurements vs. Drive Power 493 7.6.1 Mixer Measurements vs. LO Drive 493 7.6.2 Mixer Measurements vs. RF Drive Level 497 7.7 TOI and Mixers 501 7.7.1 IMD vs. LO Drive Power 502 7.7.2 IMD vs. RF Power 502 7.7.3 IMD vs. Frequency Response 505 7.8 Noise Figure in Mixers and Converters 507 7.9 Special Cases 507 7.9.1 Mixers with RF or LO Multipliers 507 7.9.2 Segmented Sweeps 509 7.9.3 Measuring Higher-Order Products 509 7.9.4 Mixers with an Embedded LO 515 7.9.5 High-Gain and High-Power Converters 517 7.10 I/Q Converters and Modulators 518 7.11 Conclusions on Mixer Measurements 530 References 531 8 Spectrum Analysis: Distortion and Modulation Measurements 533 8.1 Spectrum Analysis in Vector Network Analyzers 534 8.1.1 Spectrum Analysis Fundamentals 534 8.1.2 SA Block Diagrams: Image Rejection: Hardware vs. Software 539 8.1.3 Attributes of Repetitive Signals and Spectrum Measurements 546 8.1.4 Coherent Spectrum Analysis 559 8.1.5 Calibration of SA Results 568 8.1.6 Two-Tone Measurements, IMD, and TOI Definition 571 8.1.7 Measurement Techniques for Two-Tone TOI 574 8.1.8 Swept IMD 576 8.1.9 Optimizing Results 579 8.1.10 Error Correction 582 8.2 Distortion Measurement of Complex Modulated Signals 583 8.2.1 Adjacent Power Measurements 584 8.2.2 Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurements 587 8.2.3 NPR Signal Quality and Correction 592 8.2.4 EVM Derived from Distortion Measurements 596 8.3 Measurements of Spurious Signals with VNA Spectrum Analyzer 605 8.3.1 Spurious at Predictable Frequencies 605 8.3.2 Multiport Mixer Spurious Measurements 607 8.3.3 Spurious Oscillations 608 8.4 Measurements of Pulsed Signals and Time-Gated Spectrum Analysis 611 8.4.1 Understanding Pulsed Spectrum 611 8.4.2 Time-Gated Spectrum Analysis 612 8.5 Summary 615 Reference 615 9 Measuring Noise Figure and Noise Power 617 9.1 Noise-Figure Measurements for Amplifiers 617 9.1.1 Definition of Noise Figure 618 9.1.2 Noise-Power Measurements 619 9.1.3 Computing Noise Figure from Noise Powers 623 9.1.4 Computing DUT Noise Figure from Y-Factor Measurements 624 9.1.5 Cold-Source Methods 626 9.1.6 Noise Parameters 628 9.1.7 Noise Parameter Measurement Results 634 9.1.8 Error Correction in Noise Figure Measurements 637 9.2 Active Antenna Noise-Figure Measurements (G/T) 638 9.3 Noise Figure in Mixers and Converters 642 9.3.1 Y-Factor Measurements on Mixers 642 9.3.2 Cold-Source Measurements on Mixers 644 9.4 Other Noise-Related Measurements 650 9.4.1 Noise Power Measurements with a VNA Spectrum Analyzer 650 9.4.2 Noise-Power Measurements 650 9.4.3 Noise Figure Measurements Using Spectrum Analysis 653 9.4.4 Carrier-to-Noise Measurements 654 9.5 Uncertainty, Verification, and Improvement of Noise-Figure Measurements 655 9.5.1 Uncertainty of Noise-Figure Measurements 655 9.5.2 Existing Methodologies 656 9.5.3 Techniques for Improving Noise-Figure Measurements 665 9.6 Summary: Noise and Noise-Figure Measurements 668 References 668 10 VNA Balanced Measurements 669 10.1 Differential and Balanced S-Parameters 669 10.2 3-Port Balanced Devices 674 10.3 Measurement Examples for Mixed-Mode Devices 675 10.3.1 Passive Differential Devices: Balanced Transmission Lines 675 10.3.2 Differential Amplifier Measurements 680 10.3.3 Differential Amplifiers and Non-linear Operation 682 10.4 True-Mode VNA for Non-linear Testing 689 10.4.1 True-Mode Instruments 689 10.4.2 True-Mode Measurements 692 10.4.3 Determining the Phase Skew of a Differential Device 698 10.4.4 Differential Harmonic Measurements 700 10.5 Differential Testing Using Baluns, Hybrids, and Transformers 708 10.5.1 Transformers vs. Hybrids 708 10.5.2 Using Hybrids and Baluns with a 2-Port VNA 711 10.6 Distortion Measurements of Differential Devices 714 10.6.1 Comparing Single-Ended IMD Measurement to True-Mode Measurements 715 10.6.2 Differential IMD without Baluns 718 10.7 Noise Figure Measurements on Differential Devices 723 10.7.2 Measurement Setup 725 10.8 Conclusions on Differential Device Measurement 731 References 732 11 Advanced Measurement Techniques 733 11.1 Creating Your Own Cal-Kits 733 11.1.1 PC Board Example 734 11.1.2 Evaluating PC Board Fixtures 735 11.2 Fixturing and De-embedding 750 11.2.1 De-embedding Mathematics 751 11.3 Determining S-Parameters for Fixtures 753 11.3.1 Fixture Characterization Using 1-Port Calibrations 753 11.4 Automatic Port Extensions (APE) 759 11.5 AFR: Fixture Removal Using Time Domain 764 11.5.1 2-Port AFR 764 11.5.2 Fixture-Enhanced AFR 768 11.5.3 1-Port AFR 770 11.6 Embedding Port-Matching Elements 772 11.7 Impedance Transformations 774 11.8 De-embedding High-Loss Devices 775 11.9 Understanding System Stability 778 11.9.1 Determining Cable Transmission Stability 778 11.9.2 Determining Cable Mismatch Stability 778 11.9.3 Reflection Tracking Stability 781 11.10 Some Final Comments on Advanced Techniques and Measurements 782 References 783 Appendix A Physical Constants 785 Appendix B Common RF and Microwave Connectors 787 Appendix C Common Waveguides 789 Appendix D Some Definitions for Calibration Kit Opens and Shorts 791 Appendix E Frequency, Wavelength, and Period 795 Index 797

    15 in stock

    £108.86

  • Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields: From

    ISTE Ltd and John Wiley & Sons Inc Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields: From

    Out of stock

    Book SynopsisEveryone, whether they like it or not, is exposed to electromagnetic fields, most of the time, at very low levels. In this case, they are inconsequential, but they can cause adverse health effects when they become intense enough. This topic is complex and sensitive. Covering frequencies from 0 Hz to 300 GHz, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields provides an overview of this vast topic. After a reminder of the concepts of electromagnetic fields, the author presents some examples of sources of radiation in daily life and in the industrial or medical sectors. The biophysical and biological effects of these fields on the human body are detailed and the exposure limits are recalled. The exposure assessment and the implementation of the appropriate regulation within companies are also covered. Technically and practically, this book is aimed at people with a scientific background, risk prevention actors, health physicians, especially occupational doctors, and equipment designers.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xix Chapter 1 Concepts of Electromagnetic Fields 1 1.1 Concepts of fields 1 1.1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.2 Electric fields 3 1.1.3 Magnetic fields 6 1.1.4 Introduction to electromagnetic fields 10 1.2 Waves, frequencies and wavelengths 12 1.2.1 Waves 12 1.2.2 Frequencies and periods 13 1.2.3 Wavelengths 14 1.3 Propagation of electromagnetic waves 15 1.3.1 Propagation in free space 15 1.3.2 Polarization of the wave 21 1.3.3 Near field/far field 21 1.3.4 Propagation in a real environment 24 1.3.5 Summary of electromagnetic waves 25 1.4 Type of radiation 25 1.4.1 Ionizing radiations 26 1.4.2 Non-ionizing radiations 27 1.4.3 Electromagnetic spectrum 27 1.4.4 Frequency bands 29 1.4.5 Area of exposure to electromagnetic fields 32 1.4.6 Summary of electromagnetic radiations 33 Chapter 2 Sources of Electromagnetic Fields 35 2.1 Natural fields 35 2.1.1 Electric fields 35 2.1.2 Magnetic fields 36 2.1.3 Electromagnetic fields 36 2.2 Artificial fields 36 2.2.1 Static and quasi-static fields 37 2.2.2 Low-frequency fields 45 2.2.3 HF fields 59 2.2.4 Summary of sources 86 Chapter 3 Biophysical Mechanisms 89 3.1 Interactions with matter 90 3.1.1 Matter exposed to an electric field 91 3.1.2 Matter exposed to a magnetic field 100 3.1.3 Summary of matter 102 3.2 Interaction with biological tissues 102 3.2.1 Electrical characteristics of biological tissues 102 3.2.2 Summary of biological tissues 106 3.2.3 Penetration of fields in biological tissues 107 3.2.4 Wave absorption and specific absorption rate 110 3.2.5 Summary of field absorption 112 3.3 Coupling with the human body 113 3.3.1 Low-frequency electric field coupling 113 3.3.2 Low-frequency magnetic field coupling 117 3.3.3 Electromagnetic field coupling 118 3.3.4 Summary of coupling mechanisms 123 Chapter 4 Biological Effects of Electromagnetic Fields 125 4.1 Direct effects 126 4.1.1 Direct effects of low-frequency fields 127 4.1.2 Direct effects of static magnetic fields ( 4.1.3 Direct effects at frequencies between 100 kHz and 300 GHz 133 4.1.4 Summary of direct biological effects 137 4.1.5 Long-term effects of electromagnetic fields 138 4.2 Indirect effects 149 4.2.1 General 149 4.2.2 Indirect effects caused by contact currents 150 4.2.3 Indirect effects caused by static magnetic fields 152 Chapter 5 Exposure Limits for Electromagnetic Fields 153 5.1 General considerations 153 5.1.1 Recommendation 1999/519/EC 155 5.1.2 Directive 2013/35/EU 155 5.2 Low-frequency limits for direct effects 156 5.2.1 Basic restrictions, ELVs at low frequencies 156 5.2.2 Reference levels or action levels at low frequencies 162 5.3 Limits for magnetic fields 5.3.1 Basic restrictions for static magnetic fields 175 5.3.2 Basic restrictions for quasi-static magnetic fields 176 5.3.3 Reference levels for static magnetic fields 177 5.4 High frequency limits for direct effects 178 5.4.1 High-frequency basic restrictions or ELVs 178 5.4.2 High-frequency reference levels and action values 181 5.4.3 Limits for induced currents 184 5.4.4 Summary of limits for high frequencies 186 5.5 Limits for indirect effects 186 5.5.1 Limits for contact currents 187 5.5.2 Limits for electric fields, indirect effects 188 5.5.3 Limits for static magnetic fields, indirect effects 188 5.6 Summary of exposure limits 189 5.7 People at particular risk 191 5.7.1 People with medical devices 192 5.7.2 Active medical devices 192 5.7.3 Passive medical devices 197 5.7.4 Limits for active implants 197 5.7.5 Pregnant women 199 Chapter 6 Exposure Indices 201 6.1 General introduction 201 6.2 Signals and definitions 202 6.2.1 Sinusoidal signal 202 6.2.2 Complex signal 203 6.2.3 rms value of a complex signal (example) 207 6.3 Introduction to exposure indices 208 6.4 Exposure index for high-frequency fields 208 6.4.1 Exposure to a single frequency greater than 100 kHz 208 6.4.2 Exposure to multiple frequencies 210 6.5 Exposure Index for low-frequency fields 212 6.5.1 Exposure to a low-frequency sinusoidal signal 213 6.5.2 Exposure to a signal of complex form 214 6.5.3 Comparison of weighted peak techniques 225 6.6 EIs: contact currents and induced currents 228 6.7 Summary of exposure indices 229 Chapter 7 Applications of Exposure Indices 233 7.1 Introduction 233 7.2 Theoretical signals 234 7.2.1 Example 1: two incoherent sinusoidal signals with similar frequencies 235 7.2.2 Example 2: signal made up of two coherent sinusoidal signals (influence of the phase) 239 7.2.3 Example 3: signal made up of two sinusoidal signals with very different frequencies 242 7.2.4 Example 4: burst 244 7.2.5 Example 5: “chopped” sinusoidal signal 246 7.2.6 Example 6: square signal 249 7.3 Real signals 255 7.3.1 Example 7: hand-held electric drill 255 7.3.2 Example 8: welding gun 259 7.3.3 Example 9: transcranial stimulation device 264 7.4 Conclusion on the index calculation examples 265 Chapter 8 Exposure Assessment 267 8.1 Introduction 267 8.1.1 Theoretical approach 268 8.1.2 Numerical approach 269 8.1.3 Metrological approach 269 8.2 Measurement: general 269 8.2.1 Process 269 8.2.2 Measuring device requirements 272 8.3 Measuring low-frequency fields 275 8.3.1 General 275 8.3.2 Measuring low-frequency magnetic fields 276 8.3.3 Measuring a static magnetic field 284 8.3.4 Measuring low-frequency electric fields 285 8.4 Measuring high-frequency electromagnetic fields 292 8.4.1 General 292 8.4.2 Measuring sensors for electromagnetic fields 292 8.4.3 Measuring device for high-frequency electromagnetic fields 295 8.4.4 Measuring high-frequency electromagnetic fields 299 8.4.5 Calibration of the measuring chain for electromagnetic fields 301 8.4.6 Sources of uncertainty in measurements of HF electromagnetic fields 301 8.5 Measuring the contact current and induced current 304 8.5.1 Measuring the contact current (indirect effect) 304 8.5.2 Measuring an induced current (direct effect) 305 8.6 Introduction to dosimetry 307 8.6.1 Definition 307 8.6.2 Experimental dosimetry 309 8.6.3 Theoretical dosimetry 313 8.6.4 Summary of dosimetry 321 Chapter 9 Implementation of Directive 2013/35/EU 323 9.1 Context of the directive 324 9.1.1 Introduction 324 9.1.2 EMF directive development 325 9.2 Implementation of the directive 327 9.2.1 Introduction 327 9.2.2 Preliminary phase 328 9.2.3 Risk assessment 334 9.2.4 Risk prevention 346 9.2.5 Other activities 352 Appendix 1 357 Appendix 2 363 Glossary 377 Bibliography 385 Index 397

    Out of stock

    £125.06

  • Cyber Security and Digital Forensics

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Cyber Security and Digital Forensics

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xvii Acknowledgment xxvii 1 A Comprehensive Study of Security Issues and Research Challenges in Different Layers of Service-Oriented IoT Architecture 1 Ankur O. Bang, Udai Pratap Rao and Amit A. Bhusari 1.1 Introduction and Related Work 2 1.2 IoT: Evolution, Applications and Security Requirements 4 1.2.1 IoT and Its Evolution 5 1.2.2 Different Applications of IoT 5 1.2.3 Different Things in IoT 7 1.2.4 Security Requirements in IoT 8 1.3 Service-Oriented IoT Architecture and IoT Protocol Stack 10 1.3.1 Service-Oriented IoT Architecture 10 1.3.2 IoT Protocol Stack 11 1.3.2.1 Application Layer Protocols 12 1.3.2.2 Transport Layer Protocols 13 1.3.2.3 Network Layer Protocols 15 1.3.2.4 Link Layer and Physical Layer Protocols 16 1.4 Anatomy of Attacks on Service-Oriented IoT Architecture 24 1.4.1 Attacks on Software Service 24 1.4.1.1 Operating System–Level Attacks 24 1.4.1.2 Application-Level Attacks 25 1.4.1.3 Firmware-Level Attacks 25 1.4.2 Attacks on Devices 26 1.4.3 Attacks on Communication Protocols 26 1.4.3.1 Attacks on Application Layer Protocols 26 1.4.3.2 Attacks on Transport Layer Protocols 28 1.4.3.3 Attacks on Network Layer Protocols 28 1.4.3.4 Attacks on Link and Physical Layer Protocols 30 1.5 Major Security Issues in Service-Oriented IoT Architecture 31 1.5.1 Application – Interface Layer 32 1.5.2 Service Layer 33 1.5.3 Network Layer 33 1.5.4 Sensing Layer 34 1.6 Conclusion 35 References 36 2 Quantum and Post-Quantum Cryptography 45 Om Pal, Manoj Jain, B.K. Murthy and Vinay Thakur 2.1 Introduction 46 2.2 Security of Modern Cryptographic Systems 46 2.2.1 Classical and Quantum Factoring of A Large Number 47 2.2.2 Classical and Quantum Search of An Item 49 2.3 Quantum Key Distribution 49 2.3.1 BB84 Protocol 50 2.3.1.1 Proposed Key Verification Phase for BB84 51 2.3.2 E91 Protocol 51 2.3.3 Practical Challenges of Quantum Key Distribution 52 2.3.4 Multi-Party Quantum Key Agreement Protocol 53 2.4 Post-Quantum Digital Signature 53 2.4.1 Signatures Based on Lattice Techniques 54 2.4.2 Signatures Based on Multivariate Quadratic Techniques 55 2.4.3 Hash-Based Signature Techniques 55 2.5 Conclusion and Future Directions 55 References 56 3 Artificial Neural Network Applications in Analysis of Forensic Science 59 K.R. Padma and K.R. Don 3.1 Introduction 60 3.2 Digital Forensic Analysis Knowledge 61 3.3 Answer Set Programming in Digital Investigations 61 3.4 Data Science Processing with Artificial Intelligence Models 63 3.5 Pattern Recognition Techniques 63 3.6 ANN Applications 65 3.7 Knowledge on Stages of Digital Forensic Analysis 65 3.8 Deep Learning and Modelling 67 3.9 Conclusion 68 References 69 4 A Comprehensive Survey of Fully Homomorphic Encryption from Its Theory to Applications 73 Rashmi Salavi, Dr. M. M. Math and Dr. U. P. Kulkarni 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Homomorphic Encryption Techniques 76 4.2.1 Partial Homomorphic Encryption Schemes 77 4.2.2 Fully Homomorphic Encryption Schemes 78 4.3 Homomorphic Encryption Libraries 79 4.4 Computations on Encrypted Data 83 4.5 Applications of Homomorphic Encryption 85 4.6 Conclusion 86 References 87 5 Understanding Robotics through Synthetic Psychology 91 Garima Saini and Dr. Shabnam 5.1 Introduction 91 5.2 Physical Capabilities of Robots 92 5.2.1 Artificial Intelligence and Neuro Linguistic Programming (NLP) 93 5.2.2 Social Skill Development and Activity Engagement 93 5.2.3 Autism Spectrum Disorders 93 5.2.4 Age-Related Cognitive Decline and Dementia 94 5.2.5 Improving Psychosocial Outcomes through Robotics 94 5.2.6 Clients with Disabilities and Robotics 94 5.2.7 Ethical Concerns and Robotics 95 5.3 Traditional Psychology, Neuroscience and Future Robotics 95 5.4 Synthetic Psychology and Robotics: A Vision of the Future 97 5.5 Synthetic Psychology: The Foresight 98 5.6 Synthetic Psychology and Mathematical Optimization 99 5.7 Synthetic Psychology and Medical Diagnosis 99 5.7.1 Virtual Assistance and Robotics 100 5.7.2 Drug Discovery and Robotics 100 5.8 Conclusion 101 References 101 6 An Insight into Digital Forensics: History, Frameworks, Types and Tools 105 G Maria Jones and S Godfrey Winster 6.1 Overview 105 6.2 Digital Forensics 107 6.2.1 Why Do We Need Forensics Process? 107 6.2.2 Forensics Process Principles 108 6.3 Digital Forensics History 108 6.3.1 1985 to 1995 108 6.3.2 1995 to 2005 109 6.3.3 2005 to 2015 110 6.4 Evolutionary Cycle of Digital Forensics 111 6.4.1 Ad Hoc 111 6.4.2 Structured Phase 111 6.4.3 Enterprise Phase 112 6.5 Stages of Digital Forensics Process 112 6.5.1 Stage 1 - 1995 to 2003 112 6.5.2 Stage II - 2004 to 2007 113 6.5.3 Stage III - 2007 to 2014 114 6.6 Types of Digital Forensics 115 6.6.1 Cloud Forensics 116 6.6.2 Mobile Forensics 116 6.6.3 IoT Forensics 116 6.6.4 Computer Forensics 117 6.6.5 Network Forensics 117 6.6.6 Database Forensics 118 6.7 Evidence Collection and Analysis 118 6.8 Digital Forensics Tools 119 6.8.1 X-Ways Forensics 119 6.8.2 SANS Investigative Forensics Toolkit – SIFT 119 6.8.3 EnCase 119 6.8.4 The Sleuth Kit/Autopsy 122 6.8.5 Oxygen Forensic Suite 122 6.8.6 Xplico 122 6.8.7 Computer Online Forensic Evidence Extractor (COFEE) 122 6.8.8 Cellebrite UFED 122 6.8.9 OSForeniscs 123 6.8.10 Computer-Aided Investigative Environment (CAINE) 123 6.9 Summary 123 References 123 7 Digital Forensics as a Service: Analysis for Forensic Knowledge 127 Soumi Banerjee, Anita Patil, Dipti Jadhav and Gautam Borkar 7.1 Introduction 127 7.2 Objective 128 7.3 Types of Digital Forensics 129 7.3.1 Network Forensics 129 7.3.2 Computer Forensics 142 7.3.3 Data Forensics 147 7.3.4 Mobile Forensics 149 7.3.5 Big Data Forensics 154 7.3.6 IoT Forensics 155 7.3.7 Cloud Forensics 157 7.4 Conclusion 161 References 161 8 4S Framework: A Practical CPS Design Security Assessment & Benchmarking Framework 163 Neel A. Patel, Dhairya A. Parekh, Yash A. Shah and Ramchandra Mangrulkar 8.1 Introduction 164 8.2 Literature Review 166 8.3 Medical Cyber Physical System (MCPS) 170 8.3.1 Difference between CPS and MCPS 171 8.3.2 MCPS Concerns, Potential Threats, Security 171 8.4 CPSSEC vs. Cyber Security 172 8.5 Proposed Framework 173 8.5.1 4S Definitions 174 8.5.2 4S Framework-Based CPSSEC Assessment Process 175 8.5.3 4S Framework-Based CPSSEC Assessment Score Breakdown & Formula 181 8.6 Assessment of Hypothetical MCPS Using 4S Framework 187 8.6.1 System Description 187 8.6.2 Use Case Diagram for the Above CPS 188 8.6.3 Iteration 1 of 4S Assessment 189 8.6.4 Iteration 2 of 4S Assessment 195 8.7 Conclusion 200 8.8 Future Scope 201 References 201 9 Ensuring Secure Data Sharing in IoT Domains Using Blockchain 205 Tawseef Ahmed Teli, Rameez Yousuf and Dawood Ashraf Khan 9.1 IoT and Blockchain 205 9.1.1 Public 208 9.1.1.1 Proof of Work (PoW) 209 9.1.1.2 Proof of Stake (PoS) 209 9.1.1.3 Delegated Proof of Stake (DPoS) 210 9.1.2 Private 210 9.1.3 Consortium or Federated 210 9.2 IoT Application Domains and Challenges in Data Sharing 211 9.3 Why Blockchain? 214 9.4 IoT Data Sharing Security Mechanism On Blockchain 216 9.4.1 Double-Chain Mode Based On Blockchain Technology 216 9.4.2 Blockchain Structure Based On Time Stamp 217 9.5 Conclusion 219 References 219 10 A Review of Face Analysis Techniques for Conventional and Forensic Applications 223 Chethana H.T. and Trisiladevi C. Nagavi 10.1 Introduction 224 10.2 Face Recognition 225 10.2.1 Literature Review on Face Recognition 226 10.2.2 Challenges in Face Recognition 228 10.2.3 Applications of Face Recognition 229 10.3 Forensic Face Recognition 229 10.3.1 Literature Review on Face Recognition for Forensics 231 10.3.2 Challenges of Face Recognition in Forensics 233 10.3.3 Possible Datasets Used for Forensic Face Recognition 235 10.3.4 Fundamental Factors for Improving Forensics Science 235 10.3.5 Future Perspectives 237 10.4 Conclusion 238 References 238 11 Roadmap of Digital Forensics Investigation Process with Discovery of Tools 241 Anita Patil, Soumi Banerjee, Dipti Jadhav and Gautam Borkar 11.1 Introduction 242 11.2 Phases of Digital Forensics Process 244 11.2.1 Phase I - Identification 244 11.2.2 Phase II - Acquisition and Collection 245 11.2.3 Phase III - Analysis and Examination 245 11.2.4 Phase IV - Reporting 245 11.3 Analysis of Challenges and Need of Digital Forensics 246 11.3.1 Digital Forensics Process has following Challenges 246 11.3.2 Needs of Digital Forensics Investigation 247 11.3.3 Other Common Attacks Used to Commit the Crime 248 11.4 Appropriateness of Forensics Tool 248 11.4.1 Level of Skill 248 11.4.2 Outputs 252 11.4.3 Region of Emphasis 252 11.4.4 Support for Additional Hardware 252 11.5 Phase-Wise Digital Forensics Techniques 253 11.5.1 Identification 253 11.5.2 Acquisition 254 11.5.3 Analysis 256 11.5.3.1 Data Carving 257 11.5.3.2 Different Curving Techniques 259 11.5.3.3 Volatile Data Forensic Toolkit Used to Collect and Analyze the Data from Device 260 11.5.4 Report Writing 265 11.6 Pros and Cons of Digital Forensics Investigation Process 266 11.6.1 Advantages of Digital Forensics 266 11.6.2 Disadvantages of Digital Forensics 266 11.7 Conclusion 267 References 267 12 Utilizing Machine Learning and Deep Learning in Cybesecurity: An Innovative Approach 271 Dushyant Kaushik, Muskan Garg, Annu, Ankur Gupta and Sabyasachi Pramanik 12.1 Introduction 271 12.1.1 Protections of Cybersecurity 272 12.1.2 Machine Learning 274 12.1.3 Deep Learning 276 12.1.4 Machine Learning and Deep Learning: Similarities and Differences 278 12.2 Proposed Method 281 12.2.1 The Dataset Overview 282 12.2.2 Data Analysis and Model for Classification 283 12.3 Experimental Studies and Outcomes Analysis 283 12.3.1 Metrics on Performance Assessment 284 12.3.2 Result and Outcomes 285 12.3.2.1 Issue 1: Classify the Various Categories of Feedback Related to the Malevolent Code Provided 285 12.3.2.2 Issue 2: Recognition of the Various Categories of Feedback Related to the Malware Presented 286 12.3.2.3 Issue 3: According to the Malicious Code, Distinguishing Various Forms of Malware 287 12.3.2.4 Issue 4: Detection of Various Malware Styles Based on Different Responses 287 12.3.3 Discussion 288 12.4 Conclusions and Future Scope 289 References 292 13 Applications of Machine Learning Techniques in the Realm of Cybersecurity 295 Koushal Kumar and Bhagwati Prasad Pande 13.1 Introduction 296 13.2 A Brief Literature Review 298 13.3 Machine Learning and Cybersecurity: Various Issues 300 13.3.1 Effectiveness of ML Technology in Cybersecurity Systems 300 13.3.2 Machine Learning Problems and Challenges in Cybersecurity 302 13.3.2.1 Lack of Appropriate Datasets 302 13.3.2.2 Reduction in False Positives and False Negatives 302 13.3.2.3 Adversarial Machine Learning 302 13.3.2.4 Lack of Feature Engineering Techniques 303 13.3.2.5 Context-Awareness in Cybersecurity 303 13.3.3 Is Machine Learning Enough to Stop Cybercrime? 304 13.4 ML Datasets and Algorithms Used in Cybersecurity 304 13.4.1 Study of Available ML-Driven Datasets Available for Cybersecurity 304 13.4.1.1 KDD Cup 1999 Dataset (DARPA1998) 305 13.4.1.2 NSL-KDD Dataset 305 13.4.1.3 ECML-PKDD 2007 Discovery Challenge Dataset 305 13.4.1.4 Malicious URL’s Detection Dataset 306 13.4.1.5 ISOT (Information Security and Object Technology) Botnet Dataset 306 13.4.1.6 CTU-13 Dataset 306 13.4.1.7 MAWILab Anomaly Detection Dataset 307 13.4.1.8 ADFA-LD and ADFA-WD Datasets 307 13.4.2 Applications ML Algorithms in Cybersecurity Affairs 307 13.4.2.1 Clustering 309 13.4.2.2 Support Vector Machine (SVM) 309 13.4.2.3 Nearest Neighbor (NN) 309 13.4.2.4 Decision Tree 309 13.4.2.5 Dimensionality Reduction 310 13.5 Applications of Machine Learning in the Realm of Cybersecurity 310 13.5.1 Facebook Monitors and Identifies Cybersecurity Threats with ML 310 13.5.2 Microsoft Employs ML for Security 311 13.5.3 Applications of ML by Google 312 13.6 Conclusions 313 References 313 14 Security Improvement Technique for Distributed Control System (DCS) and Supervisory Control-Data Acquisition (SCADA) Using Blockchain at Dark Web Platform 317 Anand Singh Rajawat, Romil Rawat and Kanishk Barhanpurkar 14.1 Introduction 318 14.2 Significance of Security Improvement in DCS and SCADA 322 14.3 Related Work 323 14.4 Proposed Methodology 324 14.4.1 Algorithms Used for Implementation 327 14.4.2 Components of a Blockchain 327 14.4.3 MERKLE Tree 328 14.4.4 The Technique of Stack and Work Proof 328 14.4.5 Smart Contracts 329 14.5 Result Analysis 329 14.6 Conclusion 330 References 331 15 Recent Techniques for Exploitation and Protection of Common Malicious Inputs to Online Applications 335 Dr. Tun Myat Aung and Ni Ni Hla 15.1 Introduction 335 15.2 SQL Injection 336 15.2.1 Introduction 336 15.2.2 Exploitation Techniques 337 15.2.2.1 In-Band SQL Injection 337 15.2.2.2 Inferential SQL Injection 338 15.2.2.3 Out-of-Band SQL Injection 340 15.2.3 Causes of Vulnerability 340 15.2.4 Protection Techniques 341 15.2.4.1 Input Validation 341 15.2.4.2 Data Sanitization 341 15.2.4.3 Use of Prepared Statements 342 15.2.4.4 Limitation of Database Permission 343 15.2.4.5 Using Encryption 343 15.3 Cross Site Scripting 344 15.3.1 Introduction 344 15.3.2 Exploitation Techniques 344 15.3.2.1 Reflected Cross Site Scripting 345 15.3.2.2 Stored Cross Site Scripting 345 15.3.2.3 DOM-Based Cross Site Scripting 346 15.3.3 Causes of Vulnerability 346 15.3.4 Protection Techniques 347 15.3.4.1 Data Validation 347 15.3.4.2 Data Sanitization 347 15.3.4.3 Escaping on Output 347 15.3.4.4 Use of Content Security Policy 348 15.4 Cross Site Request Forgery 349 15.4.1 Introduction 349 15.4.2 Exploitation Techniques 349 15.4.2.1 HTTP Request with GET Method 349 15.4.2.2 HTTP Request with POST Method 350 15.4.3 Causes of Vulnerability 350 15.4.3.1 Session Cookie Handling Mechanism 350 15.4.3.2 HTML Tag 351 15.4.3.3 Browser’s View Source Option 351 15.4.3.4 GET and POST Method 351 15.4.4 Protection Techniques 351 15.4.4.1 Checking HTTP Referer 351 15.4.4.2 Using Custom Header 352 15.4.4.3 Using Anti-CSRF Tokens 352 15.4.4.4 Using a Random Value for each Form Field 352 15.4.4.5 Limiting the Lifetime of Authentication Cookies 353 15.5 Command Injection 353 15.5.1 Introduction 353 15.5.2 Exploitation Techniques 354 15.5.3 Causes of Vulnerability 354 15.5.4 Protection Techniques 355 15.6 File Inclusion 355 15.6.1 Introduction 355 15.6.2 Exploitation Techniques 355 15.6.2.1 Remote File Inclusion 355 15.6.2.2 Local File Inclusion 356 15.6.3 Causes of Vulnerability 357 15.6.4 Protection Techniques 357 15.7 Conclusion 358 References 358 16 Ransomware: Threats, Identification and Prevention 361 Sweta Thakur, Sangita Chaudhari and Bharti Joshi 16.1 Introduction 361 16.2 Types of Ransomwares 364 16.2.1 Locker Ransomware 364 16.2.1.1 Reveton Ransomware 365 16.2.1.2 Locky Ransomware 366 16.2.1.3 CTB Locker Ransomware 366 16.2.1.4 TorrentLocker Ransomware 366 16.2.2 Crypto Ransomware 367 16.2.2.1 PC Cyborg Ransomware 367 16.2.2.2 OneHalf Ransomware 367 16.2.2.3 GPCode Ransomware 367 16.2.2.4 CryptoLocker Ransomware 368 16.2.2.5 CryptoDefense Ransomware 368 16.2.2.6 CryptoWall Ransomware 368 16.2.2.7 TeslaCrypt Ransomware 368 16.2.2.8 Cerber Ransomware 368 16.2.2.9 Jigsaw Ransomware 369 16.2.2.10 Bad Rabbit Ransomware 369 16.2.2.11 WannaCry Ransomware 369 16.2.2.12 Petya Ransomware 369 16.2.2.13 Gandcrab Ransomware 369 16.2.2.14 Rapid Ransomware 370 16.2.2.15 Ryuk Ransomware 370 16.2.2.16 Lockergoga Ransomware 370 16.2.2.17 PewCrypt Ransomware 370 16.2.2.18 Dhrama/Crysis Ransomware 370 16.2.2.19 Phobos Ransomware 371 16.2.2.20 Malito Ransomware 371 16.2.2.21 LockBit Ransomware 371 16.2.2.22 GoldenEye Ransomware 371 16.2.2.23 REvil or Sodinokibi Ransomware 371 16.2.2.24 Nemty Ransomware 371 16.2.2.25 Nephilim Ransomware 372 16.2.2.26 Maze Ransomware 372 16.2.2.27 Sekhmet Ransomware 372 16.2.3 MAC Ransomware 372 16.2.3.1 KeRanger Ransomware 373 16.2.3.2 Go Pher Ransomware 373 16.2.3.3 FBI Ransom Ransomware 373 16.2.3.4 File Coder 373 16.2.3.5 Patcher 373 16.2.3.6 ThiefQuest Ransomware 374 16.2.3.7 Keydnap Ransomware 374 16.2.3.8 Bird Miner Ransomware 374 16.3 Ransomware Life Cycle 374 16.4 Detection Strategies 376 16.4.1 Unevil 376 16.4.2 Detecting File Lockers 376 16.4.3 Detecting Screen Lockers 377 16.4.4 Connection-Monitor and Connection-Breaker Approach 377 16.4.5 Ransomware Detection by Mining API Call Usage 377 16.4.6 A New Static-Based Framework for Ransomware Detection 377 16.4.7 White List-Based Ransomware Real-Time Detection Prevention (WRDP) 378 16.5 Analysis of Ransomware 378 16.5.1 Static Analysis 379 16.5.2 Dynamic Analysis 379 16.6 Prevention Strategies 380 16.6.1 Access Control 380 16.6.2 Recovery After Infection 380 16.6.3 Trapping Attacker 380 16.7 Ransomware Traits Analysis 380 16.8 Research Directions 384 16.9 Conclusion 384 References 384 Index 389

    15 in stock

    £169.16

  • Introduction to Fuzzy Logic

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Introduction to Fuzzy Logic

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisLearn more about the history, foundations, and applications of fuzzy logic in this comprehensive resource by an academic leader Introduction to Fuzzy Logic delivers a high-level but accessible introduction to the rapidly growing and evolving field of fuzzy logic and its applications. Distinguished engineer, academic, and author James K. Peckol covers a wide variety of practical topics, including the differences between crisp and fuzzy logic, the people and professions who find fuzzy logic useful, and the advantages of using fuzzy logic. While the book assumes a solid foundation in embedded systems, including basic logic design, and C/C++ programming, it is written in a practical and easy-to-read style that engages the reader and assists in learning and retention. The author includes introductions of threshold and perceptron logic to further enhance the applicability of the material contained within. After introducing readers to the topic with a brief description of the history and development of the field, Introduction to Fuzzy Logic goes on to discuss a wide variety of foundational and advanced topics, like: A review of Boolean algebra, including logic minimization with algebraic means and Karnaugh mapsA discussion of crisp sets, including classic set membership, set theory and operations, and basic classical crisp set propertiesA discussion of fuzzy sets, including the foundations of fuzzy sets logic, set membership functions, and fuzzy set propertiesAn analysis of fuzzy inference and approximate reasoning, along with the concepts of containment and entailment and relations between fuzzy subsetsPerfect for mid-level and upper-level undergraduate and graduate students in electrical, mechanical, and computer engineering courses, Introduction to Fuzzy Logic covers topics included in many artificial intelligence, computational intelligence, and soft computing courses. Math students and professionals in a wide variety of fields will also significantly benefit from the material covered in this book.Table of ContentsPreface (1-11) Acknowledgements ( 1 ) About the Author ( 1 ) Introduction Chapter 1 A Brief Introduction and History 1 Introduction 1 Models of Human Reasoning 1 The Early Foundation 2 Building On The Past - From Those Who Laid The Foundation 3 A Learning and Reasoning Taxonomy 4 Rote Learning 4 Learning With a Teacher 5 Learning by Example 5 Analogical or Metaphorical Learning 6 Learning by Problem Solving 6 Learning By Discovery 7 Crisp and Fuzzy Logic 7 Starting To Think Fuzzy 7 History Revisited - Early Mathematics 9 Foundations of Fuzzy Logic 9 Fuzzy Logic And Approximate Reasoning 9 Non-Monotonic Reasoning 11 Sets and Logic 12 Classical Sets 12 Fuzzy Subsets 13 Fuzzy Membership Functions 14 Expert Systems 16 Summary 17 Review questions 17 Chapter 2 A Review of Boolean Algebra 19 Introduction to crisp logic and Boolean Algebra 19 Introduction to algebra 20 Postulates 20 Theorems 23 Getting some practice 24 Getting to work 24 Boolean Algebra 24 Implementation 28 Logic minimization 29 Algebraic Means 29 Karnaugh Maps 30 Applying the K-map 30 2 Variable K-Maps 31 3 Variable K-Maps 32 4 Variable K-Maps 33 Going Backwards 33 Don’t Care Variables 35 Summary 37 Review questions 37 Chapter 3 Crisp Sets and Sets and More Sets 38 Introducing the Basics 38 Introduction to Classic Sets and Set Membership 41 Classic Sets 41 Set Membership 41 Basic Classic Crisp Set Properties 45 Exploring Sets and Set Membership 46 Fundamental Terminology 47 Elementary Vocabulary 47 Classical Set Theory and Operations 49 Classic Set Logic 49 Basic Classical Crisp Set Properties 50 Basic Crisp Applications – A First Step 57 Summary 59 Review questions 60 Chapter 4 Fuzzy Sets and Sets and More Sets 61 Introducing Fuzzy 61 Early Mathematics 62 Foundations of Fuzzy Sets Logic 62 Introducing the Basics 64 Introduction to Fuzzy Sets and Set Membership 66 Fuzzy Subsets and Fuzzy Logic 66 Fuzzy Membership Functions 68 Fuzzy Set Theory and Operations 71 Fundamental Terminology 71 Basic Fuzzy Set Properties and Operations 72 Basic Fuzzy Applications – A First Step 83 A Crisp Activity revisited 83 Fuzzy Imprecision and Membership Functions 86 Linear Membership Functions 87 Curved Membership Functions 90 Summary 95 Review questions 96 Chapter 5 What do You Mean by That? 97 Language, Linguistic Variables, Sets And Hedges 97 Symbols And Sounds To Real World Objects 99 Crisp Sets a Second Look 99 Fuzzy Sets a Second Look 103 Linguistic Variables 103 Membership Functions 105 Hedges 106 Summary 110 Review questions 111 Chapter 6 If There Were Four Philosophers 112 Fuzzy Inference And Approximate Reasoning 112 Equality 113 Containment And Entailment 116 Relations Between Fuzzy Subsets 119 Union and Intersection 119 Conjunction and Disjunction 121 Conditional Relations 125 Composition Revisited 127 Max-Min Composition 128 Max-Product Composition 130 Inference In Fuzzy Logic 137 Summary 140 Review questions 141 Chapter 7 So How Do I Use This Stuff? 142 Introduction 142 Fuzzification and Defuzzification 143 Fuzzification 143 Defuzzification 146 Fuzzy Inference Revisited 147 Fuzzy Implication 148 Fuzzy Inference - Single Premise 149 Max Criterion 150 Mean of Maximum 151 Center of Gravity 152 Fuzzy Inference - Multiple Premises 153 Getting to work - Fuzzy Control and Fuzzy Expert Systems 154 Membership Functions 158 System Behavior 159 Defuzzification Strategy 160 Membership Functions 162 System Behavior 163 Defuzzification Strategy 164 Summary 165 Review questions 166 Chapter 8 I Can Do This Stuff !!! 167 Introduction 167 Applications 167 Design Methodology 168 Executing a Design Methodology 169 Summary 172 Review questions 172 Chapter 9 Moving to Threshold Logic !!! 173 Introduction 173 Threshold Logic 173 Executing a Threshold Logic Design 174 Designing an AND Gate 175 Designing an OR Gate 175 Designing a Fundamental Boolean Function 176 The Downfall of Threshold Logic Design 179 Summary 180 Review Questions 181 Chapter 10 Moving to Perceptron Logic !!! 182 Introduction 182 The Biological Neuron 183 Dissecting the Biological Neuron 184 The Artificial Neuron – A First Step 185 The Perceptron – The Second Step 189 The Basic Perceptron 190 Single and Multilayer Perceptron 192 Bias and Activation Function 193 Learning with Perceptrons – First Step 196 Learning with Perceptrons – The Learning Rule 197 Learning with Perceptrons –Second Step 200 Path of the Perceptron Inputs 201 Testing of the Perceptron 203 Summary 204 Review Questions 205 Appendix A Requirements and Design Specifications 207 Introduction 207 Identifying the requirements 209 Formulating the requirements specification 211 The Environment 212 Characterizing External Entities 212 The System 213 Characterizing the System 214 System Inputs And Outputs 214 Functional View 215 Operational View 215 Technological View 215 Safety, Security, And Reliability 216 The System Design Specification 223 The System 225 Quantifying the System 225 System Requirements Versus System Design Specifications 335 Appendix B Introduction to UML 237 Introduction 237 Use Cases 238 Writing a Use Case 240 Class Diagrams 241 Class Relationships 242 Inheritance or Generalization 242 Interface 243 Containment 243 Aggregation 243 Composition 244 Dynamic Modeling with UML 245 Interaction Diagrams 245 Call and Return 246 Create and Destroy 246 Send 247 Sequence diagrams 247 Fork and join 248 Branch and merge 249 Activity diagram 250 State chart diagrams 251 Events 251 State Machines and State Chart Diagrams 252 UML State Chart Diagrams 252 Transitions 253 Guard Conditions 253 Composite States 254 Sequential States 254 History States 255 Concurrent Substates 255 Data Source / Sink 256 Data Store 256 Preparing for Test 258 Thinking Test 258 Examining the Environment 259 Test Equipment 259 The Eye Diagram 260 Generating the Eye Diagram 260 Interpreting the Eye Diagram 261 Back of the Envelope Examination 262 A First Step Check List 262 Routing and Topology 263 Summary 263 Bibliography Index

    15 in stock

    £96.26

  • Ham Radio For Dummies

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Ham Radio For Dummies

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisTable of ContentsIntroduction 1 About This Book 1 My Assumptions about You 2 Icons Used in This Book 3 Beyond the Book 3 Where to Go from Here 4 Part 1: Getting Started with Ham Radio 5 Chapter 1: Getting Acquainted with Ham Radio 7 Exploring Ham Radio around the World 8 Tuning into Ham Radio 9 Using electronics and technology 10 Joining the ham radio community 12 Radiosport — Competing with Ham Radio 15 Communicating through Ham Radio Contacts 16 Ragchews 17 Nets 17 Citizen Science and HamSCI 18 Chapter 2: Getting a Handle on Ham Radio Technology 21 Getting to Know Basic Ham Radio Gear 21 Building a Basic Ham Radio Station 23 Basic stations 23 Communication Technologies 26 Understanding the Fundamentals of Radio Waves 28 Frequency and wavelength 29 The radio spectrum 30 Dealing with Mother Nature 32 Experiencing nature affecting radio waves 32 Overcoming radio noise 33 Chapter 3: Finding Other Hams: Your Support Group 35 Finding and Being a Mentor 36 Interacting in Online Communities 37 Social media and blogs 37 Videos, podcasts, and webinars 38 Email reflectors 39 Online training and instruction 40 Web portals 41 Joining Radio Clubs 41 Finding and choosing a club 42 Participating in meetings 44 Getting more involved 45 Exploring the ARRL 46 ARRL benefits to you 47 ARRL benefits to the hobby 48 ARRL benefits to the public 49 Taking Part in Specialty Groups 50 On the Air — IOTA, SOTA, and POTA 50 Young Hams — YOTA 51 Competitive clubs 51 Handiham 52 AMSAT 53 TAPR 54 YLRL 55 QRP clubs 56 Attending Hamfests and Conventions 57 Finding and preparing for hamfests 57 Buying equipment at hamfests 58 Finding conventions and conferences 59 Part 2: Wading through the Licensing Process 63 Chapter 4: Understanding the Licensing System 65 Getting Acquainted with the Amateur Service 66 FCC rules 66 Ham radio frequency allocations 67 Learning about Types of Licenses 69 Technician class 70 General class 70 Amateur Extra class 70 Grandfathered classes 71 Getting Licensed 72 Studying the exam questions 72 Taking your license exam 72 Volunteer examiner coordinators 73 Volunteer examiners 73 Receiving Your New Call Sign 74 Call-sign prefixes and suffixes 74 Class and call sign 75 Chapter 5: Preparing for Your License Exam 77 Getting a Grip on the Technician Exam 77 Finding Study Resources 78 Licensing classes 79 Books, websites, and videos 80 Online practice exams 82 Locating Your Mentor 82 Chapter 6: Taking the Exam 85 Types of Exams 86 Public in-person exams 86 Remote exams 86 Exams at events 87 Exam sessions in homes and online 87 Finding an Exam Session 88 Registering with the Universal Licensing System (ULS) 88 Getting to Exam Day 90 What to have with you 91 What to expect 91 What to do after the exam 93 Chapter 7: Obtaining Your License and Call Sign 95 Completing Your Licensing Paperwork 95 Finding Your Call Sign 98 Searching the ULS database 98 Searching other websites for call signs 99 Printing your license 100 Identifying with your new privileges 101 Picking Your Own Call Sign 101 Searching for available call signs 102 Applying for a vanity call sign 103 Maintaining Your License 104 Part 3: Hamming It Up 105 Chapter 8: Receiving Signals 107 Learning by Listening 107 Finding out where to listen 108 Understanding how bands are organized 109 Using Your Receiver 110 Tuning and scanning with channels 112 Continuous tuning with a knob 113 Software-controlled tuning 114 Listening on VHF and UHF 115 Listening on HF 116 Using beacon networks and contact maps 118 Receiving Signals 121 Receiving FM voice 121 Receiving SSB voice 125 Receiving digital voice 127 Receiving digital or data modes 128 Receiving Morse code 131 Chapter 9: Basic Operating 133 Understanding Contacts (QSOs) 134 Common parts of contacts 135 Casual contacts 139 Nets and talk groups — On-the-air meetings 139 Contests and DXing — Radiosport 141 How contacts get started 142 Joining a contact 144 Failing to make contact 145 During a contact 147 Calling CQ 150 Casual Conversation — Ragchewing 152 Knowing where to chew 152 Identifying a ragchewer 154 Calling CQ for a ragchew 155 Making Repeater and Simplex Contacts 156 Understanding repeater basics 156 Making a repeater contact 160 Using access control 161 Miscellaneous repeater features 163 Maximizing your signal 164 Setting up your radio 164 Making a simplex contact 168 Digital Voice Systems 169 HF digital voice 170 VHF/UHF digital voice 170 Digital repeater networks 172 The DMR system 176 Casual Operating on HF 178 HF bands 178 Picking good times to operate 179 Contacts on CW and digital modes 181 Chapter 10: Public Service Operating 185 Joining a Public Service Group 186 Finding a public service group 186 Volunteering for ARES 188 Preparing for Emergencies and Disasters 189 Knowing who 189 Knowing where 190 Knowing what 190 Knowing how 192 Operating in Emergencies and Disasters 193 Reporting an accident or other incident 194 Making and responding to distress calls 195 Providing Public Service 197 Weather monitoring and SKYWARN 197 Parades and charity events 198 Participating in Nets 199 Checking in and out 200 Exchanging information 200 Tactical call signs 202 Radio discipline 202 Digital Message Networks 203 Winlink — email by radio 204 AREDN 206 NBEMS 207 Chapter 11: Operating Specialties 209 Getting Digital 210 Digital definitions 211 WSJT modes — fast and slow 212 FT8 and FT4 213 PSK31 and PSK63 216 Radioteletype (RTTY) 216 Non-WSJT MFSK modes 218 PACTOR, ARDOP, and VARA 219 Packet radio 220 APRS and tracking 220 DXing — Chasing Distant Stations 223 VHF/UHF DXing with a Technician license 223 HF DXing with a General license 227 Taking Part in Radio Contests 235 Choosing a contest 237 Operating in a contest 238 Chasing Awards 245 Finding awards and special events 245 Logging contacts for awards 246 Applying for awards 247 Mastering Morse Code (CW) 247 Learning Morse correctly 248 Copying the code 249 Pounding brass — sending Morse 250 Making code contacts 251 QRP (Low Power) and Portable Operating 251 Getting started with QRP 252 Portable operating 253 Direction-finding (ARDF) 256 Operating via Satellites 257 Getting grounded in satellite basics 257 Accessing satellites 258 Seeing Things: Image Communication 259 Slow-scan television 259 Fast-scan television 261 Part 4: Building and Operating a Station That Works 263 Chapter 12: Getting on the Air 265 What is a Station? 265 Planning Your Station 266 Deciding what you want to do 266 Deciding how to operate 267 Choosing a Radio 270 Allocating your resources 271 Software defined radios 272 Radios for VHF and UHF operating 273 Radios for HF operating 278 Filtering and noise 281 Choosing an Antenna 282 Beam antennas 283 VHF/UHF antennas 284 HF antennas 285 Feed line and connectors 289 Supporting Your Antenna 293 Antennas and trees 293 Masts and tripods 294 Towers 295 Rotators 296 Station Accessories 298 Mikes, keys, and keyers 298 Antenna system gadgets 299 Digital mode interfaces 301 Remote Control Stations 302 Remote control rules 302 Accessing a remote control station 303 Upgrading Your Station 304 Chapter 13: Organizing a Home Station 307 Designing Your Station 307 Keeping a station notebook 308 Building in ergonomics 309 Viewing some example ham stations 312 Building in RF and Electrical Safety 316 Electrical safety 316 RF exposure 317 First aid 318 Grounding and Bonding 319 AC and DC power 320 Lightning 320 RF management 321 Chapter 14: Computers in Your Ham Station 323 What Type of Computers Do Hams Use? 323 Windows 324 Linux 324 Macintosh 324 Android and iOS 324 Microcontrollers 325 What Do Ham Computers Do? 325 Software-defined radio 326 WSJT-X and fldigi 327 Radio and remote control 327 Hardware considerations 328 Keeping a Log of Your Contacts 329 Paper logging 329 Computer logging 330 Submitting a contest log 333 Confirming Your Contacts 335 QSL cards 335 QSLing electronically 336 Direct QSLing 337 Using QSL managers 337 Bureaus and QSL services 338 Applying for awards 339 Chapter 15: Operating Away from Home 341 Mobile Stations 341 HF mobile radios 342 Mobile installations 343 Mobile antennas 347 Portable Operating 349 Portable antennas 353 Portable power 354 Field Day 355 Field Day “gotchas” 357 Chapter 16: Hands-On Radio 359 Acquiring Tools and Components 360 Maintenance tools 360 Repair and building tools 366 Components for repairs and building 368 Maintaining Your Station 370 Overall Troubleshooting 372 Troubleshooting Your Station 372 Power problems 373 RF problems 374 Operational problems 375 Troubleshooting RF Interference 377 Dealing with interference to other equipment 378 Dealing with interference to your equipment 380 Building Equipment from a Kit 383 Building Equipment from Scratch 384 Part 5: The Part of Tens 385 Chapter 17: Ham Radio Jargon — Say What? 387 Spoken Q-signals 387 Contesting or Radiosport 388 Antenna Varieties 388 Feed Lines 389 Antenna Tuners 389 Repeater Operating 390 Grid Squares 391 Interference and Noise 391 Connector Parts 392 Solar and Geomagnetic Activity 393 Chapter 18: Technical Fundamentals 395 Electrical Units and Symbols 395 Ohm’s Law 396 Power 397 Decibels 397 Attenuation, Loss, and Gain 398 Bandwidth 398 Filters 399 Antenna Patterns 400 Standing Wave Ratio (SWR) 401 Battery Characteristics 402 Satellite Tracking 402 Chapter 19: Tips for Masters 405 Listening to Everything 405 Learning How It Works 406 Following the Protocol 406 Keeping Your Axe Sharp 406 Practice to Make Perfect 406 Paying Attention to Detail 407 Knowing What You Don’t Know 407 Maintaining Radio Discipline 407 Make Small Improvements Continuously 408 Help Others and Accept Help from Others 408 Index 409

    15 in stock

    £20.79

  • Embedded Digital Control with Microcontrollers

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Embedded Digital Control with Microcontrollers

    15 in stock

    Book SynopsisEMBEDDED DIGITAL CONTROL WITH MICROCONTROLLERS Explore a concise and practical introduction to implementation methods and the theory of digital control systems on microcontrollers Embedded Digital Control with Microcontrollers delivers expert instruction in digital control system implementation techniques on the widely used ARM Cortex-M microcontroller. The accomplished authors present the included information in three phases. First, they describe how to implement prototype digital control systems via the Python programming language in order to help the reader better understand theoretical digital control concepts. Second, the book offers readers direction on using the C programming language to implement digital control systems on actual microcontrollers. This will allow readers to solve real-life problems involving digital control, robotics, and mechatronics. Finally, readers will learn how to merge the theoretical and practical issuTable of ContentsPreface xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 What is a System? 1 1.2 What is a Control System? 1 1.3 About the Book 3 2 Hardware to be Used in the Book 5 2.1 The STM32 Board 5 2.1.1 General Information 6 2.1.2 Pin Layout 6 2.1.3 Powering and Programming the Board 8 2.2 The STM32 Microcontroller 8 2.2.1 Central Processing Unit 8 2.2.2 Memory 9 2.2.3 Input and Output Ports 10 2.2.4 Timer Modules 10 2.2.5 ADC and DAC Modules 11 2.2.6 Digital Communication Modules 11 2.3 System and Sensors to be Used Throughout the Book 12 2.3.1 The DC Motor 12 2.3.1.1 Properties of the DC Motor 12 2.3.1.2 Pin Layout 13 2.3.1.3 Power Settings 14 2.3.2 The DC Motor Drive Expansion Board 14 2.3.3 Encoder 15 2.3.4 The FT232 Module 17 2.4 Systems and Sensors to be Used in Advanced Applications 17 2.4.1 Systems 17 2.4.2 Sensors 19 2.5 Summary 19 Problems 20 3 Software to be Used in the Book 23 3.1 Python on PC 24 3.1.1 Basic Operations 24 3.1.2 Array and Matrix Operations 25 3.1.3 Loop Operations 26 3.1.4 Conditional Statements 27 3.1.5 Function Definition and Usage 27 3.1.6 File Operations 28 3.1.7 Python Control Systems Library 28 3.2 MicroPython on the STM32 Microcontroller 29 3.2.1 Setting up MicroPython 29 3.2.2 Running MicroPython 31 3.2.3 Reaching Microcontroller Hardware 34 3.2.3.1 Input and Output Ports 34 3.2.3.2 Timers 35 3.2.3.3 ADC 37 3.2.3.4 DAC 39 3.2.3.5 UART 41 3.2.4 MicroPython Control Systems Library 42 3.3 C on the STM32 Microcontroller 43 3.3.1 Creating a New Project in Mbed Studio 44 3.3.2 Building and Executing the Code 45 3.3.3 Reaching Microcontroller Hardware 45 3.3.3.1 Input and Output Ports 46 3.3.3.2 Timers 47 3.3.3.3 ADC 48 3.3.3.4 DAC 50 3.3.3.5 UART 51 3.3.4 C Control Systems Library 53 3.4 Application: Running the DC Motor 53 3.4.1 Hardware Setup 54 3.4.2 Procedure 54 3.4.3 C Code for the System 54 3.4.4 Python Code for the System 57 3.4.5 Observing Outputs 59 3.5 Summary 59 Problems 60 4 Fundamentals of Digital Control 63 4.1 Digital Signals 63 4.1.1 Mathematical Definition 64 4.1.2 Representing Digital Signals in Code 64 4.1.2.1 Representation in Python 65 4.1.2.2 Representation in C 65 4.1.3 Standard Digital Signals 65 4.1.3.1 Unit Pulse Signal 66 4.1.3.2 Step Signal 67 4.1.3.3 Ramp Signal 68 4.1.3.4 Parabolic Signal 68 4.1.3.5 Exponential Signal 69 4.1.3.6 Sinusoidal Signal 71 4.1.3.7 Damped Sinusoidal Signal 71 4.1.3.8 Rectangular Signal 72 4.1.3.9 Sum of Sinusoids Signal 73 4.1.3.10 Sweep Signal 75 4.1.3.11 Random Signal 76 4.2 Digital Systems 77 4.2.1 Mathematical Definition 77 4.2.2 Representing Digital Systems in Code 78 4.2.2.1 Representation in Python 78 4.2.2.2 Representation in C 79 4.2.3 Digital System Properties 79 4.2.3.1 Stability 79 4.2.3.2 Linearity 80 4.2.3.3 Time-Invariance 81 4.3 Linear and Time-Invariant Systems 81 4.3.1 Mathematical Definition 81 4.3.2 LTI Systems and Constant-Coefficient Difference Equations 82 4.3.3 Representing LTI Systems in Code 82 4.3.3.1 MicroPython Control Systems Library Usage 83 4.3.3.2 C Control Systems Library Usage 84 4.3.3.3 Python Control Systems Library Usage 85 4.3.4 Connecting LTI Systems 87 4.3.4.1 Series Connection 87 4.3.4.2 Parallel Connection 88 4.3.4.3 Feedback Connection 89 4.4 The z-Transform and Its Inverse 90 4.4.1 Definition of the z-Transform 90 4.4.2 Calculating the z-Transform in Python 92 4.4.3 Definition of the Inverse z-Transform 92 4.4.4 Calculating the Inverse z-Transform in Python 92 4.5 The z-Transform and LTI Systems 93 4.5.1 Associating Difference Equation and Impulse Response of an LTI System 93 4.5.2 Stability Analysis of an LTI System using z-Transform 95 4.5.3 Stability Analysis of an LTI System in Code 95 4.6 Application I: Acquiring Digital Signals from the Microcontroller, Processing Offline Data 96 4.6.1 Hardware Setup 97 4.6.2 Procedure 97 4.6.3 C Code for the System 97 4.6.4 Python Code for the System 99 4.6.5 Observing Outputs 101 4.7 Application II: Acquiring Digital Signals from the Microcontroller, Processing Real-Time Data 103 4.7.1 Hardware Setup 103 4.7.2 Procedure 103 4.7.3 C Code for the System 104 4.7.4 Python Code for the System 106 4.7.5 Observing Outputs 109 4.8 Summary 109 Problems 109 5 Conversion Between Analog and Digital Forms 111 5.1 Converting an Analog Signal to Digital Form 112 5.1.1 Mathematical Derivation of ADC 112 5.1.2 ADC in Code 114 5.2 Converting a Digital Signal to Analog Form 117 5.2.1 Mathematical Derivation of DAC 117 5.2.2 DAC in Code 118 5.3 Representing an Analog System in Digital Form 120 5.3.1 Pole-Zero Matching Method 121 5.3.2 Zero-Order Hold Equivalent 122 5.3.3 Bilinear Transformation 123 5.4 Application: Exciting and Simulating the RC Filter 124 5.4.1 Hardware Setup 125 5.4.2 Procedure 125 5.4.3 C Code for the System 125 5.4.4 Python Code for the System 127 5.4.5 Observing Outputs 129 5.5 Summary 129 Problems 129 6 Constructing Transfer Function of a System 131 6.1 Transfer Function from Mathematical Modeling 131 6.1.1 Fundamental Electrical and Mechanical Components 132 6.1.2 Constructing the Differential Equation Representing the System 133 6.1.3 From Differential Equation to Transfer Function 133 6.2 Transfer Function from System Identification in Time Domain 134 6.2.1 Theoretical Background 135 6.2.2 The Procedure 135 6.2.3 Data Acquisition by the STM32 Microcontroller 136 6.2.4 System Identification in Time Domain by MATLAB 137 6.3 Transfer Function from System Identification in Frequency Domain 142 6.3.1 Theoretical Background 142 6.3.2 The Procedure 142 6.3.3 System Identification in Frequency Domain by MATLAB 143 6.4 Application: Obtaining Transfer Function of the DC Motor 143 6.4.1 Mathematical Modeling 143 6.4.2 System Identification in Time Domain 146 6.4.3 System Identification in Frequency Domain 147 6.5 Summary 148 Problems 148 7 Transfer Function Based Control System Analysis 151 7.1 Analyzing System Performance 151 7.1.1 Time Domain Analysis 151 7.1.1.1 Transient Response 152 7.1.1.2 Steady-State Error 156 7.1.2 Frequency Domain Analysis 156 7.1.3 Complex Plane Analysis 159 7.1.3.1 Root-Locus Plot 160 7.1.3.2 Nyquist Plot 160 7.2 The Effect of Open-Loop Control on System Performance 163 7.2.1 What is Open-Loop Control? 163 7.2.2 Improving the System Performance by Open-Loop Control 164 7.3 The Effect of Closed-Loop Control on System Performance 167 7.3.1 What is Closed-Loop Control? 167 7.3.2 Improving the System Performance by Closed-Loop Control 170 7.4 Application: Adding Open-Loop Digital Controller to the DC Motor 174 7.4.1 Hardware Setup 175 7.4.2 Procedure 175 7.4.3 C Code for the System 175 7.4.4 Python Code for the System 177 7.4.5 Observing Outputs 178 7.5 Summary 178 Problems 180 8 Transfer Function Based Controller Design 183 8.1 PID Controller Structure 183 8.1.1 The P Controller 184 8.1.2 The PI Controller 184 8.1.3 The PID Controller 185 8.1.4 Parameter Tuning Methods 185 8.1.4.1 The Ziegler–Nichols Method 186 8.1.4.2 The Cohen–Coon Method 186 8.1.4.3 The Chien–Hrones–Reswick Method 186 8.2 PID Controller Design in Python 187 8.2.1 Parameter Tuning 188 8.2.2 Controller Design 188 8.2.2.1 P Controller 188 8.2.2.2 PI Controller 191 8.2.2.3 PID Controller 194 8.2.3 Comparison of the Designed P, PI, and PID Controllers 197 8.3 Lag–Lead Controller Structure 199 8.3.1 Lag Controller 199 8.3.2 Lead Controller 200 8.3.3 Lag–Lead Controller 200 8.4 Lag–Lead Controller Design in MATLAB 201 8.4.1 Control System Designer Tool 201 8.4.2 Controller Design in Complex Plane 203 8.4.2.1 Lag Controller 204 8.4.2.2 Lead Controller 206 8.4.2.3 Lag–Lead Controller 207 8.4.2.4 Comparison of the Designed Lag, Lead, and Lag–Lead Controllers 210 8.4.3 Controller Design in Frequency Domain 211 8.4.3.1 Lag Controller 211 8.4.3.2 Lead Controller 213 8.4.3.3 Lag–Lead Controller 213 8.4.3.4 Comparison of the Designed Lag, Lead, and Lag–Lead Controllers 217 8.5 Application: Adding Closed-Loop Digital Controller to the DC Motor 217 8.5.1 Hardware Setup 217 8.5.2 Procedure 217 8.5.3 C Code for the System 218 8.5.4 Python Code for the System 219 8.5.5 Observing Outputs 220 8.6 Summary 223 Problems 224 9 State-space Based Control System Analysis 227 9.1 State-space Approach 227 9.1.1 Definition of the State 227 9.1.2 Why State-space Representation? 228 9.2 State-space Equations Representing an LTI System 228 9.2.1 Continuous-time State-space Equations 229 9.2.2 Discrete-time State-space Equations 231 9.2.3 Representing Discrete-time State-space Equations in Code Form 231 9.3 Conversion Between State-space and Transfer Function Representations 233 9.3.1 From Transfer Function to State-space Equations 233 9.3.2 From State-space Equations to Transfer Function 235 9.4 Properties of the System from its State-space Representation 236 9.4.1 Time Domain Analysis 236 9.4.2 Stability 237 9.4.3 Controllability 238 9.4.4 Observability 239 9.5 Application: Observing States of the DC Motor in Time 240 9.5.1 Hardware Setup 240 9.5.2 Procedure 240 9.5.3 C Code for the System 240 9.5.4 Python Code for the System 242 9.5.5 Observing Outputs 243 9.6 Summary 243 Problems 244 10 State-space Based Controller Design 247 10.1 General Layout 247 10.1.1 Control Based on State Values 248 10.1.2 Regulator Structure 249 10.1.3 Controller Structure 249 10.1.4 What if States Cannot be Measured Directly? 250 10.2 Regulator and Controller Design via Pole Placement 250 10.2.1 Pole Placement 251 10.2.2 Regulator Design 251 10.2.3 Ackermann’s Formula for the Regulator Gain 251 10.2.4 Controller Design 252 10.2.5 Ackermann’s Formula for the Controller Gain 253 10.3 Regulator and Controller Design in Python 253 10.3.1 Regulator Design 253 10.3.2 Controller Design 256 10.4 State Observer Design 260 10.4.1 Mathematical Derivation 261 10.4.2 Ackermann’s Formula for the Observer Gain 262 10.5 Regulator and Controller Design in Python using Observers 263 10.5.1 Observer Design 263 10.5.2 Observer-Based Regulator Design 264 10.5.3 Observer-Based Controller Design 266 10.6 Application: State-space based Control of the DC Motor 270 10.6.1 Hardware Setup 270 10.6.2 Procedure 271 10.6.3 C Code for the System 271 10.6.4 Python Code for the System 273 10.6.5 Observing Outputs 274 10.7 Summary 275 Problems 275 11 Adaptive Control 279 11.1 What is Adaptive Control? 279 11.2 Parameter Estimation 280 11.3 Indirect Self-Tuning Regulator 283 11.3.1 Feedback ISTR Design 283 11.3.2 Feedback and Feedforward ISTR Design 287 11.4 Model-Reference Adaptive Control 288 11.5 Application: Real-Time Parameter Estimation of the DC Motor 290 11.5.1 Hardware Setup 290 11.5.2 Procedure 291 11.5.3 C Code for the System 291 11.5.4 Observing Outputs 293 11.6 Summary 297 Problems 297 12 Advanced Applications 299 12.1 Nonlinear Control 299 12.1.1 Nonlinear System Identification by MATLAB 299 12.1.2 Nonlinear System Input–Output Example 301 12.1.3 Gain Scheduling Example 302 12.1.4 Flat Systems Example 302 12.1.5 Phase Portraits Example 302 12.2 Optimal Control 302 12.2.1 The Linear Quadratic Regulator 303 12.2.2 Continuous-Time LQR Example 304 12.2.3 LQR for the DC Motor 304 12.3 Robust Control 305 12.4 Distributed Control 306 12.4.1 Hardware and Software Setup 306 12.4.2 Procedure 307 12.5 Auto Dimmer 308 12.5.1 Hardware Setup 308 12.5.2 Procedure 309 12.6 Constructing a Servo Motor from DC Motor 309 12.6.1 Hardware Setup 309 12.6.2 Procedure 310 12.7 Visual Servoing 311 12.7.1 Hardware Setup 312 12.7.2 Procedure 312 12.8 Smart Balance Hoverboard 313 12.8.1 Hardware Setup 313 12.8.2 Procedure 314 12.9 Line Following Robot 314 12.9.1 Hardware Setup 314 12.9.2 Procedure 314 12.10 Active Noise Cancellation 315 12.10.1 Hardware Setup 315 12.10.2 Procedure 316 12.11 Sun Tracking Solar Panel 317 12.11.1 Hardware Setup 317 12.11.2 Procedure 317 12.12 System Identification of a Speaker 318 12.12.1 Hardware Setup 319 12.12.2 Procedure 319 12.13 Peltier Based Water Cooler 321 12.13.1 Hardware Setup 321 12.13.2 Procedure 322 12.14 Controlling a Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 322 12.14.1 Hardware Setup 322 12.14.2 Procedure 323 Appendix A STM32 Board Pin Usage Tables 329 Bibliography 335 Index 339

    15 in stock

    £98.06

  • Practical Power Plant Engineering

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Practical Power Plant Engineering

    4 in stock

    Book SynopsisPractical Power Plant Engineering offers engineers, new to the profession, a guide to the methods of practical design, equipment selection and operation of power and heavy industrial plants as practiced by experienced engineers. The authora noted expert on the topicdraws on decades of practical experience working in a number of industries with ever-changing technologies. This comprehensive book, written in 26 chapters, covers the electrical activities from plant design, development to commissioning. It is filled with descriptive examples, brief equipment data sheets, relay protection, engineering calculations, illustrations, and common-sense engineering approaches. The book explores the most relevant topics and reviews the industry standards and established engineering practices. For example, the author leads the reader through the application of MV switchgear, MV controllers, MCCs and distribution lines in building plant power distribution systems, including calculations of Table of ContentsPreface –Why This Book? vii Acknowledgments xv About the Author xvii 1 Plant from Design to Commissioning 1 2 Plant Key One-Line Diagram 31 3 Switching Equipment 75 4 Designing Plant Layout 107 5 SystemGrounding 121 6 Site and Equipment Grounding 137 7 Plant Lighting 157 8 DC System, UPS 179 9 Plant Power Distribution 191 10 Insulation Coordination, Lightning Protection 209 11 Voltage and Phasing Standards 239 12 Cables and Supporting Equipment 253 13 Power Factor Correction 285 14 Motor Selection 303 15 Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) and Harmonics 321 16 Relay Protection and Coordination 341 17 Plant Automation and Data Networking 379 18 Generation 407 19 Power Dispatch and Control 441 20 Diesel Engine Generator Plant and Standby Power 461 21 Reliability Considerations and Calculations 475 22 Fire Protection 495 23 Corrosion, Cathodic Protection 517 24 Brief Equipment Specifications and Data Sheets 531 25 Solar Power 567 26 Wind Power 599 Index 643

    4 in stock

    £90.86

© 2025 Book Curl

    • American Express
    • Apple Pay
    • Diners Club
    • Discover
    • Google Pay
    • Maestro
    • Mastercard
    • PayPal
    • Shop Pay
    • Union Pay
    • Visa

    Login

    Forgot your password?

    Don't have an account yet?
    Create account